Novel immune system modulators

ABSTRACT

The present invention relates to a compound of Formula I: 
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the symbols are as defined in the specification; a pharmaceutical composition comprising the same; and a method for treating or preventing autoimmunity disease using the same.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a divisional application of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/845,603, filed Sep. 4, 2015, which is a continuation of and claims the benefit of priority of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/179,069, filed Feb. 12, 2014, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,126,996, which is a continuation of and claims the benefit of priority of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/122,473, filed Feb. 13, 2014, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,359,361, which was the national stage filing under 35 U.S.C. §371 of PCT application no. PCT/US2012/040417, filed Jun. 1, 2012, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/491,965 filed on Jun. 1, 2011, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The invention relates to generally to the field of immunology. More particularly, the invention relates to compositions and methods for altering immune function. More specifically, the invention relates to compositions and methods for affecting immune stimulation mediated through Toll-like receptor (TLR) molecules.

BACKGROUND

Stimulation of the immune system, which includes stimulation of either or both innate immunity and adaptive immunity, is a complex phenomenon that can result in either protective or adverse physiologic outcomes for the host. In recent years there has been increased interest in the mechanisms underlying innate immunity, which is believed to initiate and support adaptive immunity. This interest has been fueled in part by the recent discovery of a family of highly conserved pattern recognition receptor proteins known as Toll-like receptors (TLRs) believed to be involved in innate immunity as receptors for pathogen-associated molecular patterns (PAMPs) and danger associated molecular patterns (DAMPs). Compositions and methods useful for modulating innate immunity are therefore of great interest, as they may affect therapeutic approaches to conditions involving autoimmunity, inflammation, atherosclerosis, allergy, asthma, graft rejection, graft versus host disease (GvHD), infection, cancer, and immunodeficiency.

Toll-like receptors (TLRs) are a family of pattern recognition and signaling molecules involved in innate immunity. This family includes at least twelve members, designated TLR1-TLR13, for which the function and specificity are known for most but not all members. Certain of these TLRs are known to signal in response to encounter with particular types of nucleic acid molecules. For example, TLR9 signals in response to CpG-containing DNA, TLR3 signals in response to double-stranded RNA, and TLR7 and TLR8 signal in response to certain single-stranded RNA. There have been a number of reports describing the immunostimulatory effect of certain types of nucleic acid molecules, including CpG nucleic acids and double-stranded RNA. Of note, it was reported that Toll-like receptor 9 (TLR9) recognizes bacterial DNA and CpG DNA while TLR7 and 8 recognize single stranded RNA: Hemmi H et al. (2000) Nature 408:740-5; Bauer S. et al. (2001) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 98:9237-42; Heil et al. (2004) Science, 303:1526. In addition to their natural ligands, certain synthetic or artificial ligands for these nucleic-acid responsive TLRs are also known. These include certain CpG oligodeoxyribonucleotides (CpG ODN), oligoribonucleotides (ORN) and certain ORN analogs, and certain small molecules including imiquimod (R-837) and resiquimod (R-848). Imiquimod and resiquimod are classified as imidazoaminoquinoline-4-amines; the former is currently marketed as Aldara™ by 3M Pharmaceuticals for topical treatment of anogenital warts associated with papillomavirus infection. In addition to their use in the treatment of certain viral infections such as papillomavirus, certain TLR agonists are also believed to be useful as adjuvants, antitumor agents, and anti-allergy agents. Because a number of diseases and conditions can be treated by enhancing innate immunity, there is a continued need for additional and improved TLR agonists.

It was also recently reported that immune complexes containing IgG and nucleic acid can stimulate TLR9 and participate in B-cell activation in certain autoimmune diseases. Leadbetter E. A. et al. (2002) Nature 416:595-8. Similar and additional documentation of these claims have been made for TLR7, 8 and 9: reviewed in Sun S. et al. (2007) Inflammation and Allergy—Drug Targets 6:223-235.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

Compounds as immune system modulators bearing a pteridine core are described. The molecules described herein can alter TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling by inhibiting TLR signaling and thus can be useful as inhibitors of immune stimulation. Compositions and methods described herein are useful for inhibiting immune stimulation in vitro and in vivo. Such compositions and methods thus are useful in a number of clinical applications, including as pharmaceutical agents and methods for treating conditions involving unwanted immune activity, including inflammatory and autoimmune disorders. The compositions of the invention can also be used in methods for the preparation of medicaments for use in the treatment of conditions involving unwanted immune activity, including a variety of inflammatory and autoimmune disorders.

In one aspect, the present invention provides a compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,

wherein Z is absent or present;

if Z is present, then

-   -   Z is L′-R_(7′);     -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a single bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a double bond; and     -   R₆ is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

if Z is absent, then

-   -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a double bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a single bond; and     -   R₆ is defined below;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl are optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, heteroaryl, aryl or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

provided that when R₅ and R₆ are H or methyl, then Q is not H.

In some embodiments, X is absent. In other embodiments, X is alkyl. In yet other embodiments, X is cycloalkyl. In yet other embodiments, X is aryl. In yet other embodiments, X is heterocycle.

In some embodiments, Y is oxygen. In other embodiments, Y is sulfur. In yet other embodiments, Y is NR₁₁.

In some embodiments, L or L′ is alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 4 carbon atoms.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I has the structure of Formula II:

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ is H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

m is 2-6;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

provided that when R₅ and R₆ are H or methyl, then Q is not H.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I has the structure of Formula III:

wherein

R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ is H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

m is 2-6;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I has the structure of Formula IV:

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

n is 2-6;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, heteroaryl, aryl or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

provided that when R₅ and R₆ are H or methyl, then Q is not H.

In some embodiments, Y is NR₁₁, and R₁₁ is H or (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In some embodiments, Q is H, OR₁, SR₁, or CHR₁R₂.

In some embodiments, R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4.

In some embodiments, NR₁R₂, NR₃R₄, and NR_(b)R_(c) are each independently a heterocycle selected from

which R_(d) is H, Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, t-Bu, CH₂CMe₃, Ph, CH₂Ph, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), wherein R₁₂ is alkyl, phenyl, or heterocycle; R_(a), R_(b) and R_(c) are each independently hydrogen, or (C₁-C₄)alkyl, or R_(b) and R_(c), together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic ring containing from three to seven ring atoms, which ring may optionally contain another heteroatom selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur and may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from the group consisting of alkyl, phenyl and benzyl; and p is 2-4.

In some embodiments, R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, (C₁-C₄)alkyl, hydroxy, (C₁-C₄)alkoxy, SR_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), in which R_(a), R_(b) and R_(c) are each independently hydrogen or (C₁-C₄)alkyl, or R_(b) and R_(c), together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic ring containing from three to seven ring atoms, which ring may optionally contain another heteroatom selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur and may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from the group consisting of alkyl, phenyl and benzyl.

In some embodiments, R₆ is

in which R_(d) is H, Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, t-Bu, CH₂CMe₃, Ph, or CH₂Ph.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I has the structure of Formula V:

wherein

A is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle; and

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂ and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In some embodiments, R₅ is selected from the group consisting of Me, CF₃, Ph, and 3,5-difluorophenyl.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I has the structure of Formula VI:

wherein

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

each occurrence of R₃ or R₄ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I has the structure of Formula VII:

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

each occurrence of R₃ or R₄ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I is one or more compounds selected from the compounds in Tables 1-3.

In another aspect, a pharmaceutical composition is described, comprising at least one a compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier or diluent,

wherein

Z is absent or present;

if Z is present, then

-   -   Z is L′-R_(7′);     -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a single bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a double bond; and     -   R₆ is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

if Z is absent, then

-   -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a double bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a single bond; and     -   R₆ is defined below;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

provided that when R₅ and R₆ are H or methyl, then Q is not H.

In yet another aspect, a method of treating an inflammatory or autoimmune disease in a mammalian species in need thereof is described, comprising administering to the mammalian species a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I,

wherein

Z is absent or present;

if Z is present, then

-   -   Z is L′-R_(7′);     -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a single bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a double bond; and     -   R₆ is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

if Z is absent, then

-   -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a double bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a single bond; and     -   R₆ is defined below;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl are optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In some embodiments, the autoimmune disease is selected from cutaneous and systemic lupus erythematosus, insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, atherosclerosis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, atherosclerosis, ankylosing spondylitis, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, Behget's syndrome, Goodpasture's syndrome, Graves' disease, Guillain-Barre syndrome, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, idiopathic thrombocytopenia, io myasthenia gravis, pernicious anemia, polyarteritis nodosa, polymyositis/dermatomyositis, primary biliary sclerosis, sarcoidosis, sclerosing cholangitis, Sjogren's syndrome, systemic sclerosis (scleroderma and CREST syndrome), Takayasu's arteritis, temporal arteritis, and Wegener's granulomatosis. In some specific embodiments, the autoimmune disease is systemic lupus erythematosus. In some specific embodiments, the autoimmune disease is insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus. In some specific embodiments, the autoimmune disease is rheumatoid arthritis. In some specific embodiments, the autoimmune disease is multiple sclerosis. In some specific embodiments, the autoimmune disease is multiple sclerosis. In some specific embodiments, the autoimmune disease is Sjogren's syndrome. In some specific embodiments, the autoimmune disease is psoriasis.

In yet another aspect, a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulation in a mammalian species in need thereof is described, comprising administering to the mammalian species a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I,

wherein

Z is absent or present;

if Z is present, then

-   -   Z is L′-R_(7′);     -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a single bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a double bond; and     -   R₆ is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

if Z is absent, then

-   -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a double bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a single bond; and     -   R₆ is defined below;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

provided that when R₅ and R₆ are H or methyl, then Q is not H.

In yet another aspect, a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling is described, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I,

wherein

Z is absent or present;

if Z is present, then

-   -   Z is L′-R_(7′);     -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a single bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a double bond; and     -   R₆ is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

if Z is absent, then

-   -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a double bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a single bond; and     -   R₆ is defined below;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

provided that when R₅ and R₆ are H or methyl, then Q is not H.

FURTHER DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Definitions

The following are definitions of terms used in the present specification. The initial definition provided for a group or term herein applies to that group or term throughout the present specification individually or as part of another group, unless otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art.

The terms “alkyl” and “alk” refer to a straight or branched chain alkane (hydrocarbon) radical containing from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Exemplary “alkyl” groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, isobutyl pentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, heptyl, 4,4-dimethylpentyl, octyl, 2,2,4-trimethylpentyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, and the like. The term “(C₁-C₄)alkyl” refers to a straight or branched chain alkane (hydrocarbon) radical containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, and isobutyl. “Substituted alkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted with one or more substituents, preferably 1 to 4 substituents, at any available point of attachment. Exemplary substituents include but are not limited to one or more of the following groups: hydrogen, halogen (e.g., a single halogen substituent or multiple halo substituents forming, in the latter case, groups such as CF₃ or an alkyl group bearing CCl₃), cyano, nitro, oxo (i.e., ═O), CF₃, OCF₃, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, aryl, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(e), S(═O)₂R_(e), P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂OR_(e), P(═O)₂OR_(e), NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)S(═O)₂R_(e), NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(d), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(e), NR_(d)C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), wherein each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; each occurrence of R_(b), R_(c) and R_(d) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the N to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle; and each occurrence of R_(e) is independently alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl. In the aforementioned exemplary substituents, groups such as alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocycle and aryl can themselves be optionally substituted.

The term “alkenyl” refers to a straight or branched chain hydrocarbon radical containing from 2 to 12 carbon atoms and at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Exemplary such groups include ethenyl or allyl. The term “C₂-C₆ alkenyl” refers to a straight or branched chain hydrocarbon radical containing from 2 to 6 carbon atoms and at least one carbon-carbon double bond, such as ethylenyl, propenyl, 2-propenyl, (E)-but-2-enyl, (Z)-but-2-enyl, 2-methy(E)-but-2-enyl, 2-methy(Z)-but-2-enyl, 2,3-dimethy-but-2-enyl, (Z)-pent-2-enyl, (E)-pent-1-enyl, (Z)-hex-1-enyl, (E)-pent-2-enyl, (Z)-hex-2-enyl, (E)-hex-2-enyl, (Z)-hex-1-enyl, (E)-hex-1-enyl, (Z)-hex-3-enyl, (E)-hex-3-enyl, and (E)-hex-1,3-dienyl. “Substituted alkenyl” refers to an alkenyl group substituted with one or more substituents, preferably 1 to 4 substituents, at any available point of attachment. Exemplary substituents include but are not limited to one or more of the following groups: hydrogen, halogen (e.g., a single halogen substituent or multiple halo substituents forming, in the latter case, groups such as CF₃ or an alkyl group bearing CCl₃), cyano, nitro, oxo (i.e., ═O), CF₃, OCF₃, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, aryl, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(e), S(═O)₂R_(e), P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂OR_(e), P(═O)₂OR_(e), NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)S(═O)₂R_(e), NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(d), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(e), NR_(d)C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), wherein each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; each occurrence of R_(b), R_(c) and R_(d) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the N to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle; and each occurrence of R_(e) is independently alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl. The exemplary substituents can themselves be optionally substituted.

The term “alkynyl” refers to a straight or branched chain hydrocarbon radical containing from 2 to 12 carbon atoms and at least one carbon to carbon triple bond. Exemplary such groups include ethynyl. The term “C₂-C₆ alkynyl” refers to a straight or branched chain hydrocarbon radical containing from 2 to 6 carbon atoms and at least one carbon-carbon triple bond, such as ethynyl, prop-1-ynyl, prop-2-ynyl, but-1-ynyl, but-2-ynyl, pent-1-ynyl, pent-2-ynyl, hex-1-ynyl, hex-2-ynyl, hex-3-ynyl. “Substituted alkynyl” refers to an alkynyl group substituted with one or more substituents, preferably 1 to 4 substituents, at any available point of attachment. Exemplary substituents include but are not limited to one or more of the following groups: hydrogen, halogen (e.g., a single halogen substituent or multiple halo substituents forming, in the latter case, groups such as CF₃ or an alkyl group bearing CCl₃), cyano, nitro, oxo (i.e., ═O), CF₃, OCF₃, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, aryl, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(e), S(═O)₂R_(e), P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂OR_(e), P(═O)₂OR_(e), NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)S(═O)₂R_(e), NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(d), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(e), NR_(d)C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), wherein each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; each occurrence of R_(b), R_(c) and R_(d) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the N to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle; and each occurrence of R_(e) is independently alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl. The exemplary substituents can themselves be optionally substituted.

The term “cycloalkyl” refers to a fully saturated cyclic hydrocarbon group containing from 1 to 4 rings and 3 to 8 carbons per ring. “C₃-C₇ cycloalkyl” refers to cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, or cycloheptyl. “Substituted cycloalkyl” refers to a cycloalkyl group substituted with one or more substituents, preferably 1 to 4 substituents, at any available point of attachment. Exemplary substituents include but are not limited to one or more of the following groups: hydrogen, halogen (e.g., a single halogen substituent or multiple halo substituents forming, in the latter case, groups such as CF₃ or an alkyl group bearing CCl₃), cyano, nitro, oxo (i.e., ═O), CF₃, OCF₃, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, aryl, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(e), S(═O)₂R_(e), P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂OR_(e), P(═O)₂OR_(e), NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)S(═O)₂R_(e), NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(d), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(e), NR_(d)C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), wherein each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; each occurrence of R_(b), R_(c) and R_(d) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the N to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle; and each occurrence of R_(e) is independently alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl. The exemplary substituents can themselves be optionally substituted. Exemplary substituents also include spiro-attached or fused cylic substituents, especially spiro-attached cycloalkyl, spiro-attached cycloalkenyl, spiro-attached heterocycle (excluding heteroaryl), fused cycloalkyl, fused cycloalkenyl, fused heterocycle, or fused aryl, where the aforementioned cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocycle and aryl substituents can themselves be optionally substituted.

The term “cycloalkenyl” refers to a partially unsaturated cyclic hydrocarbon group containing 1 to 4 rings and 3 to 8 carbons per ring. Exemplary such groups include cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, etc. “Substituted cycloalkenyl” refers to a cycloalkenyl group substituted with one more substituents, preferably 1 to 4 substituents, at any available point of attachment. Exemplary substituents include but are not limited to one or more of the following groups: hydrogen, halogen (e.g., a single halogen substituent or multiple halo substituents forming, in the latter case, groups such as CF₃ or an alkyl group bearing CCl₃), cyano, nitro, oxo (i.e., ═O), CF₃, OCF₃, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, aryl, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(e), S(═O)₂R_(e), P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂OR_(e), P(═O)₂OR_(e), NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)S(═O)₂R_(e), NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(d), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(e), NR_(d)C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), wherein each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; each occurrence of R_(b), R_(c) and R_(d) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the N to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle; and each occurrence of R_(e) is independently alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl. The exemplary substituents can themselves be optionally substituted. Exemplary substituents also include spiro-attached or fused cylic substituents, especially spiro-attached cycloalkyl, spiro-attached cycloalkenyl, spiro-attached heterocycle (excluding heteroaryl), fused cycloalkyl, fused cycloalkenyl, fused heterocycle, or fused aryl, where the aforementioned cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocycle and aryl substituents can themselves be optionally substituted.

The term “aryl” refers to cyclic, aromatic hydrocarbon groups that have 1 to 5 aromatic rings, especially monocyclic or bicyclic groups such as phenyl, biphenyl or naphthyl. Where containing two or more aromatic rings (bicyclic, etc.), the aromatic rings of the aryl group may be joined at a single point (e.g., biphenyl), or fused (e.g., naphthyl, phenanthrenyl and the like). “Substituted aryl” refers to an aryl group substituted by one or more substituents, preferably 1 to 3 substituents, at any available point of attachment. Exemplary substituents include but are not limited to one or more of the following groups: hydrogen, halogen (e.g., a single halogen substituent or multiple halo substituents forming, in the latter case, groups such as CF₃ or an alkyl group bearing CCl₃), cyano, nitro, oxo (i.e., ═O), CF₃, OCF₃, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, aryl, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(e), S(═O)₂R_(e), P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂OR_(e), P(═O)₂OR_(e), NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)S(═O)₂R_(e), NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(d), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(e), NR_(d)C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), wherein each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; each occurrence of R_(b), R_(c) and R_(d) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the N to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle; and each occurrence of R_(e) is independently alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl. The exemplary substituents can themselves be optionally substituted. Exemplary substituents also include fused cylic groups, especially fused cycloalkyl, fused cycloalkenyl, fused heterocycle, or fused aryl, where the aforementioned cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocycle and aryl substituents can themselves be optionally substituted.

The term “carbocycle” refers to a fully saturated or partially saturated cyclic hydrocarbon group containing from 1 to 4 rings and 3 to 8 carbons per ring, or cyclic, aromatic hydrocarbon groups that have 1 to 5 aromatic rings, especially monocyclic or bicyclic groups such as phenyl, biphenyl or naphthyl. The term “carbocycle” encompasses cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkynyl and aryl as defined hereinabove. The term “substituted carbocycle” refers to carbocycle or carbocyclic groups substituted with one or more substituents, preferably 1 to 4 substituents, at any available point of attachment. Exemplary substituents include, but are not limited to, those described above for substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkynyl and substituted aryl. Exemplary substituents also include spiro-attached or fused cyclic substituents at any available point or points of attachment, especially spiro-attached cycloalkyl, spiro-attached cycloalkenyl, spiro-attached heterocycle (excluding heteroaryl), fused cycloalkyl, fused cycloalkenyl, fused heterocycle, or fused aryl, where the aforementioned cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocycle and aryl substituents can themselves be optionally substituted.

The terms “heterocycle” and “heterocyclic” refer to fully saturated, or partially or fully unsaturated, including aromatic (i.e., “heteroaryl”) cyclic groups (for example, 4 to 7 membered monocyclic, 7 to 11 membered bicyclic, or 8 to 16 membered tricyclic ring systems) which have at least one heteroatom in at least one carbon atom-containing ring. Each ring of the heterocyclic group containing a heteroatom may have 1, 2, 3, or 4 heteroatoms selected from nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms and/or sulfur atoms, where the nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatoms may optionally be quaternized. (The term “heteroarylium” refers to a heteroaryl group bearing a quaternary nitrogen atom and thus a positive charge.) The heterocyclic group may be attached to the remainder of the molecule at any heteroatom or carbon atom of the ring or ring system. Exemplary monocyclic heterocyclic groups include azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, oxetanyl, pyrazolinyl, imidazolyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, oxazolyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolinyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolyl, isothiazolidinyl, furyl, tetrahydrofuryl, thienyl, oxadiazolyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, 2-oxopiperazinyl, 2-oxopiperidinyl, 2-oxopyrrolodinyl, 2-oxoazepinyl, azepinyl, hexahydrodiazepinyl, 4-piperidonyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, tetrahydropyranyl, morpholinyl, thiamorpholinyl, thiamorpholinyl sulfoxide, thiamorpholinyl sulfone, 1,3-dioxolane and tetrahydro-1,1-dioxothienyl, and the like. Exemplary bicyclic heterocyclic groups include indolyl, isoindolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzothienyl, benzo[d][1,3]dioxolyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][1,4]dioxinyl, quinuclidinyl, quinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzopyranyl, indolizinyl, benzofuryl, benzofurazanyl, chromonyl, coumarinyl, benzopyranyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, indazolyl, pyrrolopyridyl, furopyridinyl (such as furo[2,3-c]pyridinyl, furo[3,2-b]pyridinyl] or furo[2,3-b]pyridinyl), dihydroisoindolyl, dihydroquinazolinyl (such as 3,4-dihydro-4-oxo-quinazolinyl), triazinylazepinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl and the like. Exemplary tricyclic heterocyclic groups include carbazolyl, benzidolyl, phenanthrolinyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, xanthenyl and the like.

“Substituted heterocycle” and “substituted heterocyclic” (such as “substituted heteroaryl”) refer to heterocycle or heterocyclic groups substituted with one or more substituents, preferably 1 to 4 substituents, at any available point of attachment. Exemplary substituents include but are not limited to one or more of the following groups: hydrogen, halogen (e.g., a single halogen substituent or multiple halo substituents forming, in the latter case, groups such as CF₃ or an alkyl group bearing CCl₃), cyano, nitro, oxo (i.e., ═O), CF₃, OCF₃, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, aryl, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(e), S(═O)₂R_(e), P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂OR_(e), P(═O)₂OR_(e), NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)S(═O)₂R_(e), NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(d), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(e), NR_(d)C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(d)P(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or NR_(b)P(═O)₂R_(e), wherein each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; each occurrence of R_(b), R_(c) and R_(d) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the N to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle; and each occurrence of R_(e) is independently alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl. The exemplary substitutents can themselves be optionally substituted. Exemplary substituents also include spiro-attached or fused cyclic substituents at any available point or points of attachment, especially spiro-attached cycloalkyl, spiro-attached cycloalkenyl, spiro-attached heterocycle (excluding heteroaryl), fused cycloalkyl, fused cycloalkenyl, fused heterocycle, or fused aryl, where the aforementioned cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocycle and aryl substituents can themselves be optionally substituted.

The term “alkylamino” refers to a group having the structure —NHR′, wherein R′ is hydrogen, alkyl or substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl or substituted cyclolakyl, as defined herein. Examples of alkylamino groups include, but are not limited to, methylamino, ethylamino, n-propylamino, iso-propylamino, cyclopropylamino, n-butylamino, tert-butylamino, neopentylamino, n-pentylamino, hexylamino, cyclohexylamino, and the like.

The term “dialkylamino” refers to a group having the structure —NRR′, wherein R and R′ are each independently alkyl or substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl or substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl or substituted cyclolalkenyl, aryl or substituted aryl, heterocylyl or substituted heterocyclyl, as defined herein. R and R′ may be the same or different in an dialkyamino moiety. Examples of dialkylamino groups include, but are not limited to, dimethylamino, methyl ethylamino, diethylamino, methylpropylamino, di(n-propyl)amino, di(iso-propyl)amino, di(cyclopropyl)amino, di(n-butyl)amino, di(tert-butyl)amino, di(neopentyl)amino, di(n-pentyl)amino, di(hexyl)amino, di(cyclohexyl)amino, and the like. In certain embodiments, R and R′ are linked to form a cyclic structure. The resulting cyclic structure may be aromatic or non-aromatic. Examples of cyclic diaminoalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, aziridinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, 1,3,4-trianolyl, and tetrazolyl.

The terms “halogen” or “halo” refer to chlorine, bromine, fluorine or iodine.

Unless otherwise indicated, any heteroatom with unsatisfied valences is assumed to have hydrogen atoms sufficient to satisfy the valences.

The compounds of the present invention may form salts which are also within the scope of this invention. Reference to a compound of the present invention is understood to include reference to salts thereof, unless otherwise indicated. The term “salt(s)”, as employed herein, denotes acidic and/or basic salts formed with inorganic and/or organic acids and bases. In addition, when a compound of the present invention contains both a basic moiety, such as but not limited to a pyridine or imidazole, and an acidic moiety such as but not limited to a carboxylic acid, zwitterions (“inner salts”) may be formed and are included within the term “salt(s)” as used herein. Pharmaceutically acceptable (i.e., non-toxic, physiologically acceptable) salts are preferred, although other salts are also useful, e.g., in isolation or purification steps which may be employed during preparation. Salts of the compounds of the present invention may be formed, for example, by reacting a compound I with an amount of acid or base, such as an equivalent amount, in a medium such as one in which the salt precipitates or in an aqueous medium followed by lyophilization.

The compounds of the present invention which contain a basic moiety, such as but not limited to an amine or a pyridine or imidazole ring, may form salts with a variety of organic and inorganic acids. Exemplary acid addition salts include acetates (such as those formed with acetic acid or trihaloacetic acid, for example, trifluoroacetic acid), adipates, alginates, ascorbates, aspartates, benzoates, benzenesulfonates, bisulfates, borates, butyrates, citrates, camphorates, camphorsulfonates, cyclopentanepropionates, digluconates, dodecylsulfates, ethanesulfonates, fumarates, glucoheptanoates, glycerophosphates, hemisulfates, heptanoates, hexanoates, hydrochlorides, hydrobromides, hydroiodides, hydroxyethanesulfonates (e.g., 2-hydroxyethanesulfonates), lactates, maleates, methanesulfonates, naphthalenesulfonates (e.g., 2-naphthalenesulfonates), nicotinates, nitrates, oxalates, pectinates, persulfates, phenylpropionates (e.g., 3-phenylpropionates), phosphates, picrates, pivalates, propionates, salicylates, succinates, sulfates (such as those formed with sulfuric acid), sulfonates, tartrates, thiocyanates, toluenesulfonates such as tosylates, undecanoates, and the like.

The compounds of the present invention which contain an acidic moiety, such but not limited to a carboxylic acid, may form salts with a variety of organic and inorganic bases. Exemplary basic salts include ammonium salts, alkali metal salts such as sodium, lithium and potassium salts, alkaline earth metal salts such as calcium and magnesium salts, salts with organic bases (for example, organic amines) such as benzathines, dicyclohexylamines, hydrabamines (formed with N,N-bis(dehydroabietyl) ethylenediamine), N-methyl-D-glucamines, N-methyl-D-glycamides, t-butyl amines, and salts with amino acids such as arginine, lysine and the like. Basic nitrogen-containing groups may be quaternized with agents such as lower alkyl halides (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), dialkyl sulfates (e.g., dimethyl, diethyl, dibutyl, and diamyl sulfates), long chain halides (e.g., decyl, lauryl, myristyl and stearyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), aralkyl halides (e.g., benzyl and phenethyl bromides), and others.

Prodrugs and solvates of the compounds of the invention are also contemplated herein. The term “prodrug” as employed herein denotes a compound that, upon administration to a subject, undergoes chemical conversion by metabolic or chemical processes to yield a compound of the present invention, or a salt and/or solvate thereof. Solvates of the compounds of the present invention include, for example, hydrates.

Compounds of the present invention, and salts or solvates thereof, may exist in their tautomeric form (for example, as an amide or imino ether). All such tautomeric forms are contemplated herein as part of the present invention.

All stereoisomers of the present compounds (for example, those which may exist due to asymmetric carbons on various substituents), including enantiomeric forms and diastereomeric forms, are contemplated within the scope of this invention. Individual stereoisomers of the compounds of the invention may, for example, be substantially free of other isomers (e.g., as a pure or substantially pure optical isomer having a specified activity), or may be admixed, for example, as racemates or with all other, or other selected, stereoisomers. The chiral centers of the present invention may have the S or R configuration as defined by the International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC) 1974 Recommendations. The racemic forms can be resolved by physical methods, such as, for example, fractional crystallization, separation or crystallization of diastereomeric derivatives or separation by chiral column chromatography. The individual optical isomers can be obtained from the racemates by any suitable method, including without limitation, conventional methods, such as, for example, salt formation with an optically active acid followed by crystallization.

Compounds of the present invention are, subsequent to their preparation, preferably isolated and purified to obtain a composition containing an amount by weight equal to or greater than 90%, for example, equal to greater than 95%, equal to or greater than 99% of the compounds (“substantially pure” compounds), which is then used or formulated as described herein. Such “substantially pure” compounds of the present invention are also contemplated herein as part of the present invention.

All configurational isomers of the compounds of the present invention are contemplated, either in admixture or in pure or substantially pure form. The definition of compounds of the present invention embraces both cis (Z) and trans (E) alkene isomers, as well as cis and trans isomers of cyclic hydrocarbon or heterocyclic rings.

Throughout the specifications, groups and substituents thereof may be chosen to provide stable moieties and compounds.

Definitions of specific functional groups and chemical terms are described in more detail below. For purposes of this invention, the chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75^(th)Ed., inside cover, and specific functional groups are generally defined as described therein. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry, as well as specific functional moieties and reactivity, are described in “Organic Chemistry”, Thomas Sorrell, University Science Books, Sausalito: 1999, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

Certain compounds of the present invention may exist in particular geometric or stereoisomeric forms. The present invention contemplates all such compounds, including cis- and trans-isomers, R- and S-enantiomers, diastereomers, (D)-isomers, (L)-isomers, the racemic mixtures thereof, and other mixtures thereof, as falling within the scope of the invention. Additional asymmetric carbon atoms may be present in a substituent such as an alkyl group. All such isomers, as well as mixtures thereof, are intended to be included in this invention.

Isomeric mixtures containing any of a variety of isomer ratios may be utilized in accordance with the present invention. For example, where only two isomers are combined, mixtures containing 50:50, 60:40, 70:30, 80:20, 90:10, 95:5, 96:4, 97:3, 98:2, 99:1, or 100:0 isomer ratios are all contemplated by the present invention. Those of ordinary skill in the art will readily appreciate that analogous ratios are contemplated for more complex isomer mixtures.

The present invention also includes isotopically labeled compounds, which are identical to the compounds disclosed herein, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the present invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, sulfur, fluorine and chlorine, such as ²H, ³H, ¹³C, ¹¹C, ¹⁴C, ¹⁵N, ¹⁸O, ¹⁷O, ³¹P, ³²P, ³⁵S, ¹⁸F, and ³⁶Cl, respectively. Compounds of the present invention, or an enantiomer, diastereomer, tautomer, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, which contain the aforementioned isotopes and/or other isotopes of other atoms are within the scope of this invention. Certain isotopically labeled compounds of the present invention, for example those into which radioactive isotopes such as ³H and ¹⁴C are incorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. Tritiated, i.e., ³H, and carbon-14, i.e., ¹⁴C, isotopes are particularly preferred for their ease of preparation and detectability. Further, substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium, i.e., ²H, can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances. Isotopically labeled compounds can generally be prepared by carrying out the procedures disclosed in the Schemes and/or in the Examples below, by substituting a readily available isotopically labeled reagent for a non-isotopically labeled reagent.

If, for instance, a particular enantiomer of a compound of the present invention is desired, it may be prepared by asymmetric synthesis, or by derivation with a chiral auxiliary, where the resulting diastereomeric mixture is separated and the auxiliary group cleaved to provide the pure desired enantiomers. Alternatively, where the molecule contains a basic functional group, such as amino, or an acidic functional group, such as carboxyl, diastereomeric salts are formed with an appropriate optically-active acid or base, followed by resolution of the diastereomers thus formed by fractional crystallization or chromatographic means well known in the art, and subsequent recovery of the pure enantiomers.

It will be appreciated that the compounds, as described herein, may be substituted with any number of substituents or functional moieties. In general, the term “substituted” whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, and substituents contained in formulas of this invention, refer to the replacement of hydrogen radicals in a given structure with the radical of a specified substituent. When more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position. As used herein, the term “substituted” is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds. For purposes of this invention, heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valencies of the heteroatoms. Furthermore, this invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds. Combinations of substituents and variables envisioned by this invention are preferably those that result in the formation of stable compounds useful in the treatment, for example, of infectious diseases or proliferative disorders. The term “stable”, as used herein, preferably refers to compounds which possess stability sufficient to allow manufacture and which maintain the integrity of the compound for a sufficient period of time to be detected and preferably for a sufficient period of time to be useful for the purposes detailed herein.

As used herein, the term “adaptive immune response” refers to any type of antigen-specific immune response. Adaptive immune responses, which are also known in the art as specific immune responses, involve lymphocytes are also characterized by immunological memory, whereby response to a second or subsequent exposure to antigen is more vigorous than the response to a first exposure to the antigen. The term adaptive immune response encompasses both humoral (antibody) immunity and cell-mediated (cellular) immunity.

As used herein, “allergy” refers to acquired hypersensitivity to a substance (allergen). Allergic conditions include eczema, allergic rhinitis or coryza, hay fever, asthma, urticaria (hives) and food allergies, and other atopic conditions.

As used herein, the term “antigenic substance” refers to any substance that induces an adaptive (specific) immune response. An antigen typically is any substance that can be specifically bound by a T-cell antigen receptor, antibody, or B-cell antigen receptor. Antigenic substances include, without limitation, peptides, proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, phospholipids, nucleic acids, autacoids, and hormones. Antigenic substances further specifically include antigens that are classified as allergens, cancer antigens, and microbial antigens.

As used herein, “asthma” refers to a disorder of the respiratory system characterized by inflammation, narrowing of the airways and increased reactivity of the airways to inhaled agents. Asthma is frequently, although not exclusively associated with atopic or allergic symptoms. For example, asthma can be precipitated by exposure to an allergen, exposure to cold air, respiratory infection, and exertion.

As used herein, the terms “autoimmune disease” and, equivalently, “autoimmune disorder” and “autoimmunity”, refer to immunologically mediated acute or chronic injury to a tissue or organ derived from the host. The terms encompass both cellular and antibody-mediated autoimmune phenomena, as well as organ-specific and organ-nonspecific autoimmunity. Autoimmune diseases include insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus, rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, multiple sclerosis, atherosclerosis, psoriasis and inflammatory bowel disease. Autoimmune diseases also include, without limitation, ankylosing spondylitis, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, Beget's syndrome, Goodpasture's syndrome, Graves' disease, Guillain-Barre syndrome, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, idiopathic thrombocytopenia, myasthenia gravis, pernicious anemia, polyarteritis nodosa, polymyositis/dermatomyositis, primary biliary sclerosis, sarcoidosis, sclerosing cholangitis, Sjögren's syndrome, systemic sclerosis (scleroderma and CREST syndrome), Takayasu's arteritis, temporal arteritis, and Wegener's granulomatosis. Autoimmune diseases also include certain immune complex-associated diseases.

As used herein, the terms “cancer” and, equivalently, “tumor” refer to a condition in which abnormally replicating cells of host origin are present in a detectable amount in a subject. The cancer can be a malignant or non-malignant cancer. Cancers or tumors include but are not limited to biliary tract cancer; brain cancer; breast cancer; cervical cancer; choriocarcinoma; colon cancer; endometrial cancer; esophageal cancer; gastric (stomach) cancer; intraepithelial neoplasms; leukemias; lymphomas; liver cancer; lung cancer (e. g., small cell and non-small cell); melanoma; neuroblastomas; oral cancer; ovarian cancer; pancreatic cancer; prostate cancer; rectal cancer; renal (kidney) cancer; sarcomas; skin cancer; testicular cancer; thyroid cancer; as well as other carcinomas and sarcomas. Cancers can be primary or metastatic.

As used herein, the term “CpG DNA” refers to an immunostimulatory nucleic acid which contains a cytosine-guanine (CG) dinucleotide, the C residue of which is unmethylated. The effects of CpG nucleic acids on immune modulation have been described extensively in U.S. patents such as U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,194,388; 6,207,646; 6,239,116; and 6,218,371, and published international patent applications, such as W098/37919, W098/40100, W098/52581, and W099/56755. The entire contents of each of these patents and published patent applications is hereby incorporated by reference. The entire immunostimulatory nucleic acid can be unmethylated or portions may be unmethylated but at least the C of the 5′-CG-3′ must be unmethylated.

In one embodiment the CpG DNA is a CpG ODN that has a base sequence provided by 5′-TCGTCGTTTTGTCGTTTTGTCGTT-3′ (ODN 2006; SEQ ID NO: 1). CpG ODN have been further classified by structure and function into at least the following three classes or types, all of which are intended to be encompassed within the term CpG DNA as used herein: B-class CpG ODN such as ODN 2006 include the originally described immunostimulatory CpG ODN and characteristically activate B cells and NK cells but do not induce or only weakly induce expression of type I interferon (e. g., IFN-α). A− class CpG ODN, described in published PCT international application WO 01/22990, incorporate a CpG motif, include a chimeric phosphodiester/phosphorothioate backbone, and characteristically activate NK cells and induce plasmacytoid dendritic cells to express large amounts of IFN-α but do not activate or only weakly activate B cells. An example of an A− class CpG ODN is 5′-G*G*GGGACGATCGTCG*G*G*G*G*G-3′ (ODN 2216, SEQ ID NO: 2), wherein “*” represents phosphorothioate and “ ” represents phosphodiester. C-class CpG ODN incorporate a CpG, include a wholly phosphorothioate backbone, include a GC-rich palindromic or nearly-palindromic region, and are capable of both activating B cells and inducing expression of IFN-a. C-class CpG ODN have been described, for example, in published U.S. patent application 2003/0148976. An example of a C-class CpG ODN is 5′-TCGTCGTTTTCGGCGCGCGCCG-3′ (ODN 2395; SEQ ID NO: 3). For a review of the various classes of CpG ODN, see also Vollmer J et al. (2004) Eur J Immunol 34: 251-62.

As used herein, “cytokine” refers to any of a number of soluble proteins or glycoproteins that act on immune cells through specific receptors to affect the state of activation and function of the immune cells. Cytokines include interferons, interleukins, tumor necrosis factor, transforming growth factor beta, colony-stimulating factors (CSFs), chemokines, as well as others. Various cytokines affect innate immunity, acquired immunity, or both. Cytokines specifically include, without limitation, IFN-a, IFN-p, IFN-y, IL-1, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-9, IL-10, IL-12, IL-13, IL-18, TNF-a, TGF-β, granulocyte colony-stimulating factor (G-CSF), and granulocyte-macrophage colony-stimulating factor (GM-CSF). Chemokines specifically include, without limitation, IL-8, IP-10, I-TAC, RANTES, MIP-1a, MIP-1p, Gro-a, Gro-, Gro-y, MCP-1, MCP-2, and MCP-3.

Most mature CD4+T helper cells can be categorized into cytokine-associated, cross-regulatory subsets or phenotypes: Th1, Th2, Th17, or Treg. Th1 cells are associated with IL-2, IL-3, IFN, GM-CSF and high levels of TNF-α. Th2 cells are associated with IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-9, IL-10, IL-13, GM-CSF and low levels of TNF-α. The Th1 subset promotes both cell-mediated immunity and humoral immunity that is characterized by immunoglobulin class switching to IgG2a in mice. Th1 responses can also be associated with delayed-type hypersensitivity and autoimmune disease. The Th2 subset induces primarily humoral immunity and induces immunoglobulin class switching to IgE and IgGI in mice. The antibody isotypes associated with Th1 responses generally have good neutralizing and opsonizing capabilities, whereas those associated with Th2 responses are associated more with allergic responses.

Several factors have been shown to influence commitment to Th1 or Th2 profiles. The best characterized regulators are cytokines. IL-12 and IFN-y are positive Th1 and negative Th2 regulators. IL-12 promotes IFN-y production, and IFN-y provides positive feedback for IL-12. IL-4 and IL-10 appear to be required for the establishment of the Th2 cytokine profile and to down-regulate Th1 cytokine production; the effects of IL-4 are in some cases dominant over those of IL-12. IL-13 was shown to inhibit expression of inflammatory cytokines, including IL-12 and TNF-a by LPS-induced monocytes, in a way similar to IL-4.

As used herein, “effective amount” refers to any amount that is necessary or sufficient for achieving or promoting a desired outcome. In some instances an effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. A therapeutically effective amount is any amount that is necessary or sufficient for promoting or achieving a desired biological response in a subject. The effective amount for any particular application can vary depending on such factors as the disease or condition being treated, the particular agent being administered, the size of the subject, or the severity of the disease or condition. One of ordinary skill in the art can empirically determine the effective amount of a particular agent without necessitating undue experimentation.

As used herein, “graft rejection” refers to immunologically mediated hyperacute, acute, or chronic injury to a tissue or organ derived from a source other than the host. The term thus encompasses both cellular and antibody-mediated rejection, as well as rejection of both allografts and xenografts.

As used herein, the term “immune cell” refers to a cell belonging to the immune system. Immune cells include T lymphocytes (T cells), B lymphocytes (B cells), natural killer (NK) cells, granulocytes, neutrophils, macrophages, monocytes, dendritic cells, and specialized forms of any of the foregoing, e. g., plasmacytoid dendritic cells, plasma cells, NKT, T helper, and cytotoxic T lymphocytes (CTL).

As used herein, the term “immune complex” refers to any conjugate including an antibody and an antigen specifically bound by the antibody. In one embodiment, the antigen is an autoantigen.

As used herein, the term “immune complex comprising a nucleic acid” refers to any conjugate including an antibody and a nucleic acid-containing antigen specifically bound by the antibody. The nucleic acid-containing antigen can include chromatin, ribosomes, small nuclear proteins, histones, nucleosomes, DNA, RNA, or any combination thereof. The antibody can but need not necessarily bind specifically to a nucleic acid component of the nucleic acid-containing antigen. In some embodiments, the term “immune complex comprising a nucleic acid” refers also to non-antibody complexes such as HMGB1, LL-37, and other nucleic acid binding proteins such as histones, transcription factors and enzymes complexed with nucleic acids.

As used herein, the term “immune complex-associated disease” refers to any disease characterized by the production and/or tissue deposition of immune complexes, including, but not limited to systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE) and related connective tissue diseases, rheumatoid arthritis, hepatitis C- and hepatitis B-related immune complex disease (e. g., cryoglobulinemia), Beget's syndrome, autoimmune glomerulonephritides, and vasculopathy associated with the presence of LDL/anti-LDL immune complexes.

As used herein, “immunodeficiency” refers to a disease or disorder in which the subject's immune system is not functioning in normal capacity or in which it would be useful to boost a subject's immune response for example to eliminate a tumor or cancer (e. g., tumors of the brain, lung (e. g., small cell and non-small cell), ovary, breast, prostate, colon, as well as other carcinomas and sarcomas) or an infection in a subject. The immunodeficiency can be acquired or it can be congenital.

As used herein, “immunostimulatory nucleic acid-associated response in a subject” refers to a measurable response in a subject associated with administration to the subject of an immunostimulatory nucleic acid. Such responses include, without limitation, elaboration of cytokines, chemokines, growth factors, or immunoglobulin; expression of immune cell surface activation markers; Th1/Th2 skewing; and clinical disease activity.

As used herein, the terms “infection” and, equivalently, “infectious disease” refer to a condition in which an infectious organism or agent is present in a detectable amount in the blood or in a normally sterile tissue or normally sterile compartment of a subject. Infectious organisms and agents include viruses, bacteria, fungi, and parasites. The terms encompass both acute and chronic infections, as well as sepsis.

As used herein, the term “innate immune response” refers to any type of immune response to certain pathogen-associated molecular patterns (PAMPs) or danger associated molecular patterns (DAMPs). Innate immunity, which is also known in the art as natural or native immunity, involves principally neutrophils, granulocytes, mononuclear phagocytes, dendritic cells, NKT cells, and NK cells. Innate immune responses can include, without limitation, type I interferon production (e, g., IFN-a), neutrophil activation, macrophage activation, phagocytosis, opsonization, complement activation, and any combination thereof.

As used herein, the term “self-DNA” refers to any DNA derived from the genome of a host subject. In one embodiment, self-DNA includes complementary DNA (cDNA) derived from a host subject. Self-DNA includes intact and degraded DNA.

As used herein, the term “self-RNA” refers to any RNA derived from the genome of a host subject. In one embodiment self-RNA is a messenger RNA (mRNA) derived from a host subject. In another embodiment self-RNA is a regulatory RNA such as micro RNAs. In one embodiment self-RNA includes ribosomal RNA (rRNA) derived from a host subject. Self-RNA includes intact and degraded RNA.

As used herein, the term “subject” refers to a vertebrate animal. In one embodiment the subject is a mammal. In one embodiment the subject is a human. In other embodiments the subject is a non-human vertebrate animal, including, without limitation, non-human primates, laboratory animals, livestock, domesticated animals, and non-domesticated animals.

As used herein, “subject having or at risk of developing TLR-mediated immunostimulation” refers to a subject exposed to or at risk of exposure to a PAMPs, DAMPs or other TLR ligand.

As used herein, the terms “Toll-like receptor” and, equivalently, “TLR” refer to any member of a family of at least thirteen highly conserved mammalian pattern recognition receptor proteins (TLR1-TLR13) which recognize PAMPs, DAMPs and act as key signaling elements in innate immunity. TLR polypeptides share a characteristic structure that includes an extracellular (extracytoplasmic) domain that has leucine-rich repeats, a transmembrane domain, and an intracellular (cytoplasmic) domain that is involved in TLR signaling. TLRs include but are not limited to human TLRs.

Nucleic acid and amino acid sequences for all ten currently known human TLRs are available from public databases such as GenBank. Similarly, nucleic acid and amino acid sequences for various TLRs from numerous non-human species are also available from public databases including GenBank. For example, nucleic acid and amino acid sequences for human TLR9 (hTLR9) can be found as GenBank accession numbers AF245704 (coding region spanning nucleotides 145-3243) and AAF78037, respectively. Nucleic acid and amino acid sequences for murine TLR9 (mTLR9) can be found as GenBank accession numbers AF348140 (coding region spanning nucleotides 40-3138) and AAK29625, respectively. The deduced human TLR9 protein contains 1,032 amino acids and shares an overall amino acid identity of 75.5% with mouse TLR9. Like other TLR proteins, human TLR9 contains extracellular leucine-rich repeats (LRRs) and a cytoplasmic Toll/interleukin-1R (TIR) domain. It also has a signal peptide (residues 1-25) and a transmembrane domain (residues 819-836).

Nucleic acid and amino acid sequences for human TLR8 (hTLR8) can be found as GenBank accession numbers AF245703 (coding region spanning nucleotides 49-3174) and AAF78036, respectively. Nucleic acid and amino acid sequences for murine TLR8 (mTLR8) can be found as GenBank accession numbers AY035890 (coding region spanning nucleotides 59-3157) and AAK62677, respectively.

Nucleic acid and amino acid sequences for human TLR7 (hTLR7) can be found as GenBank accession numbers AF240467 (coding region spanning nucleotides 135-3285) and AAF60188, respectively. Nucleic acid and amino acid sequences for murine TLR7 (mTLR7) can be found as GenBank accession numbers AY035889 (coding region spanning nucleotides 49-3201) and AAK62676, respectively.

Nucleic acid and amino acid sequences for human TLR3 (hTLR3) can be found as GenBank accession numbers NM003265 (coding region spanning nucleotides 102-2816) and NP003256, respectively. Nucleic acid and amino acid sequences for murine TLR3 (hTLR3) can be found as GenBank accession numbers AF355152 (coding region spanning nucleotides 44-2761) and AAK26117, respectively.

While hTLR1 is ubiquitously expressed, hTLR2, hTLR4 and hTLR5 are present in monocytes, polymorphonuclear phagocytes, and dendritic cells. Muzio M et al. (2000) J Leukoc Biol 67: 450-6. Recent publications reported that hTLR1, hTLR6, hTLR7, hTLR9 and hTLR10 are present in human B cells. Human TLR7 and hTLR9 are present in plasmacytoid dendritic cells (pDCs), while myeloid dendritic cells express hTLR7 and hTLR8 but not hTLR9. Human TLR8, however, appears not to be expressed in pDCs.

As members of the pro-inflammatory interleukin-1 receptor (IL-1R) family, TLRs share homologies in their cytoplasmic domains called Toll/IL-1R homology (TIR) domains. See PCT published applications PCT/US98/08979 and PCT/US01/16766. Intracellular signaling mechanisms mediated by TLRs appear generally similar, with MyD88 and tumor necrosis factor receptor-associated factor 6 (TRAF6) believed to have critical roles. Wesche H et al. (1997) Immunity 7: 837-47; Medzhitov R et al. (1998) Mol Cell 2: 253-8; Adachi O et al. (1998) Immunity 9: 143-50; Kawai T et al. (1999) Immunity 11: 115-22); Cao Z et al. (1996) Nature 383: 443-6; Lomaga M A et al. (1999) Genes Dev 13: 1015-24. Signal transduction between MyD88 and TRAF6 is known to involve members of the serine-threonine kinase IL-1 receptor-associated kinase (IRAK) family, including at least IRAK-1 and IRAK-2. Muzio M et al. (1997) Science 278: 1612-5.

Briefly, MyD88 is believed to act as an adapter molecule between the TIR domain of a TLR or IL-1R and IRAK (which includes at least any one of IRAK-1, IRAK-2, IRAK-4, and IRAK-M). MyD88 includes a C-terminal Toll homology domain and an N-terminal death domain. The Toll homology domain of MyD88 binds the TIR domain of TLR or IL-1R, and the death domain of MyD88 binds the death domain of the serine kinase IRAK IRAK interacts with TRAF6, which acts as an entryway into at least two pathways, one leading to activation of the transcription factor NF-κB and another leading to activation of Jun and Fos, members of the activator protein-1 (AP-1) transcription factor family. Activation of NF-κB involves the activation of TAK-1, a member of the MAP 3 kinase (MAPK) family, and IKB kinases. The IoB kinases phosphorylate IKB, leading to its-degradation and the translocation of NF-κB to the nucleus. Activation of Jun and Fos is believed to involve MAP kinase kinases (MAPKKs) and MAP kinases ERK, p38, and JNK/SAPK. Both NF-κB and AP-1 are involved in controlling the transcription of a number of key immune response genes, including genes for various cytokines and costimulatory molecules. See Aderem A et al. (2000) Nature 406: 782-7; Hacker H et al. (1999) EMBO J 18: 6973-82.

As used herein, the terms “TLR ligand” and, equivalently, “ligand for a TLR” and “TLR signaling agonist”, refer to a molecule, other than a small molecule according to Formula I described herein that interacts, directly or indirectly, with a TLR through a TLR domain other than a TIR domain and induces TLR-mediated signaling. In one embodiment a TLR ligand is a natural ligand, i. e., a TLR ligand that is found in nature. In one embodiment a TLR ligand refers to a molecule other than a natural ligand of a TLR, e. g., a molecule prepared by human activity. In one embodiment the TLR is TLR9 and the TLR signal agonist is a CpG nucleic acid.

Ligands for many but not all of the TLRs have been described. For instance, it has been reported that TLR2 signals in response to peptidoglycan and lipopeptides. Yoshimura A et al. (1999) J Immunol 163: 1-5; Brightbill H D et al. (1999) Science 285: 732-6; Aliprantis A O et al. (1999) Science 285: 736-9; Takeuchi O et al. (1999) Immunity 11: 443-51; Underhill D M et al. (1999) Nature 401: 811-5. TLR4 has been reported to signal in response to lipopolysaccharide (LPS). See Hoshino K et al. (1999) Immunol 162: 3749-52; Poltorak A et al. (1998) Science 282: 2085-8; Medzhitov R et al. (1997) Nature 388: 394-7. Bacterial flagellin has been reported to be a natural ligand for TLR5. See Hayashi F et al. (2001) Nature 410: 1099-1103. TLR6, in conjunction with TLR2, has been reported to signal in response to proteoglycan. See Ozinsky A et al. (2000) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 97: 13766-71; Takeuchi O et al. (2001) Int Immunol 13: 933-40.

Recently it was reported that TLR9 is a receptor for CpG DNA. Hemmi H et al. (2000) Nature 408: 740-5; Bauer S et al. (2001) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 98: 9237-42. CpG DNA, which includes bacterial DNA and synthetic DNA with CG dinucleotides in which cytosin is unmethylated, is described in greater detail elsewhere herein. Marshak-Rothstein and colleagues also recently reported their finding that TLR9 signaling can occur in certain autoimmune diseases in response to immune complexes containing IgG and chromatin. Leadbetter E A et al. (2002) Nature 416: 595-8. Thus, in a broader sense it appears that TLR9 can signal in response to self or non-self nucleic acid, either DNA or RNA, when the nucleic acid is presented in a suitable context, e. g., as part of an immune complex.

Recently it was reported that certain imidazoquinoline compounds having antiviral activity are ligands of TLR7 and TLR8. Hemmi H et al. (2002) Nat Immunol 3: 196-200; Jurk M et al. (2002) Nat Immunol 3: 499. Imidazoquinolines are potent synthetic activators of immune cells with antiviral and antitumor properties. Using macrophages from wildtype and MyD88-deficient mice, Hemmi et al. recently reported that two imidazoquinolines, imiquimod and resiquimod (R848), induce tumor necrosis factor (TNF) and interleukin-12 (IL-12) and activate NF-κB only in wildtype cells, consistent with activation through a TLR. Hemmi H et al. (2002) Nat Immunol 3: 196-200. Macrophages from mice deficient in TLR7 but not other TLRs produced no detectable cytokines in response to these imidazoquinolines. In addition, the imidazoquinolines induced dose-dependent proliferation of splenic B cells and the activation of intracellular signaling cascades in cells from wildtype but not TLR7−/− mice. Luciferase analysis established that expression of human TLR7, but not TLR2 or TLR4, in human embryonic kidney cells results in NF-κB activation in response to resiquimod. The findings of Hemmi et al. thus suggested that these imidazoquinoline compounds are non-natural ligands of TLR7 that can induce signaling through TLR7. Recently it was reported that R848 is also a ligand for human TLR8. See Jurk M et al. (2002) Nat Immunol 3:499. Nat Immunol 3: 499. It has also been reported that ssRNA is natural ligand and that aberrant stimulation of TLR7 and or TLR8 by RNA:complexes is involved in autoimmunity.

It was recently reported that ligands of TLR3 include poly (I:C) and double-stranded RNA (dsRNA). For purposes of this invention, poly (I:C) and double-stranded RNA (dsRNA) are classified as oligonucleotide molecules. By stimulating kidney cells expressing one of a range of TLRs with poly (I:C), Alexopoulou et al. reported that only cells expressing TLR3 respond by activating NF-aB. See Alexopoulou L et al. (2001) Nature 413: 732-8.

Alexopoulou et al. also reported that wildtype cells stimulated with poly (I:C) activate NF-κB and produce inflammatory cytokines IL-6, IL-12, and TNF-α, whereas the corresponding responses of TLR3−/−cells were significantly impaired. In contrast, TLR3−/−cells responded equivalently to wildtype cells in response to lipopolysaccharide, peptidoglycan, and CpG dinucleotides. Analysis of MyD88−/−cells indicated that this adaptor protein is involved in dsRNA-induced production of cytokines and proliferative responses, although activation of NF-KB and MAP kinases are not affected, indicating distinct pathways for these cellular responses. Alexopoulou et al. proposed that TLR3 may have a role in host defense against viruses.

As used herein, a “cell expressing a TLR” refers to any cell which expresses, either naturally or artificially, a functional TLR. A functional TLR is a full-length TLR protein or a fragment thereof capable of inducing a signal in response to interaction with its ligand.

Generally, the functional TLR will include at least a TLR ligand-binding fragment of the extracellular domain of the full-length TLR and at least a fragment of a TIR domain capable of interacting with another Toll homology domain-containing polypeptide, e. g., MyD88. In various embodiments the functional TLR is a full-length TLR selected from TLR1, TLR2, TLR3, TLR4, TLR5, TLR6, TLR7, TLR8, TLR9, and TLR10.

Compounds

In one aspect, novel pteridine compounds are described. Applicants have surprisingly discovered pteridine compounds as immune system modulators. It is unexpected that the pteridine compounds as disclosed herein are useful in methods for inhibiting an immune response, both in vitro and in vivo, including methods for treating immune complex associated diseases and autoimmune disorders. In another aspect, the invention provides novel pteridine compositions. As described further below, these compositions and other pteridine compositions have been discovered to be useful in methods for inhibiting an immune response, both in vitro and in vivo, including methods for treating immune complex associated diseases and autoimmune disorders. It is also believed that the novel pteridine compositions as described herein can be used for prevention and treatment of malaria, as well as for treatment of other diseases.

In one aspect, a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is described:

wherein

Z is absent or present;

if Z is present, then

-   -   Z is L′-R_(7′);     -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a single bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a double bond; and     -   R₆ is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

if Z is absent, then

-   -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a double bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a single bond; and     -   R₆ is defined below;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

provided that when R₅ and R₆ are H or methyl, then Q is not H.

In certain embodiments, X is absent. In other embodiments, X is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, and heterocycle. In some embodiments, X is —(CH₂)_(m)—, wherein m is 2-4. In other embodiments, X is aryl. Non-limiting examples of aryl include optionally substituted phenyl and napthyl. In still other embodiments, X is a heterocycle. In some embodiments, X is a saturated hyterocycle. Non-limiting examples of saturated heterocycle includes piperizine. In other embodiments, X is an unsaturated hyterocycle. Non-limiting examples of unsaturated heterocycle includes pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, and pyridazine.

In certain embodiments, Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, CR₁R₂R_(2′), or CHR₁R₂, in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4. R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4. In some embodiments, Q is H, OR₁, SR₁, or CHR₁R₂. In other embodiments, Q is —(CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂. In some specific embodiments, Q is —(CH₂)₂NR₁R₂. In some specific embodiments, Q is

In other embodiments, Q is

wherein R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle. In some embodiments, C(═O)R₁₂ is

In still other embodiments, Q is NH(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c). In some specific embodiments, Q is NH(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)₂, NH(CH₂)₂N(CH₂CH₃)₂, or NH(CH₂)₂N(CH₃)(CH₂CH₃). In still other embodiments, Q is alkyl. Non-limiting examples of alkyl include methyl, ethyl, propyl, iso-propyl, butyl, sec-butyl, and tert-butyl.

In some embodiments, X is a phenyl group. In these embodiments, Q is attached to phenyl group at the ortho, meta, or para position relative to the pteridine core. In some specific embodiments, Q is

In some specific embodiments, Q is

attached to the phenyl group at the para position relative to the pteridine core.

In some embodiments, Y is oxygen. In other embodiments, Y is sulfur. In yet other embodiments, Y is NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group. In some embodiments, L is alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 4 carbon atoms.

In other embodiments, X is a phenyl group and Q is hydrogen. In some specific embodiments, Y is NH. In some specific embodiments, L is —(CH₂)₂—. In some specific embodiments, R₇ is NR₃R₄. In still some specific embodiments, R₃ and R₄ are combined as a morpholino group. In some specific embodiments, R₆ is

In some specific embodiments, R₅ is hydrogen. In other specific embodiments, R₅ is chloro.

In some specific embodiments, X is a phenyl group and Q is

In these embodiments, R₇ is morpholino group and Y is O or NH. Other substituent groups are as described herein.

In some specific embodiments, —X-Q is

In other specific embodiments, —X-Q is

In still other specific embodiments, —X-Q is

In still other specific embodiments, —X-Q is

In these embodiments, Y is NH, S, or O and L is —(CH₂)_(m)— wherein m is 2-6. Other substituent groups are as described herein.

In some embodiments, R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl. R_(7′) and R₇ can be the same or different. In some embodiments, R₇ or R_(7′) is H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl are optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl and R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle. In some specific embodiments, R₇ is NR₃R₄. In some specific embodiments, R₃ and R₄ are alkyl groups. In some specific embodiments, R₇ is N(CH₃)₂. In other specific embodiments, R₇ is morpholino group. In still other specific embodiments, R₇ is

In other specific embodiments, R₇ is alkyl. In still other specific embodiments, R₇ is aryl or heteroaryl. Non-limiting examples of aryl and heteroaryl group for R₇ include

In some embodiments, R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c). Each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl. In some embodiments, R₅ or R₆ is selected from the group consisting of H, CH₃, CH₂CH₃, phenyl, F, Br, Cl, OH, CF₃, SCH₃, S(═O)CH₃,

In other embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) has the structure of Formula (II):

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R₂, in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ is H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

m is 2-6;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

provided that when R₅ and R₆ are H or methyl, then Q is not H.

In yet other embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) has the structure of Formula (III):

wherein

R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ is H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

m is 2-6;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet other embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) has the structure of Formula (IV):

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

n is 2-6;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

provided that when R₅ and R₆ are H or methyl, then Q is not H.

In some specific embodiments, Y in compound of Formula (IV) is NR₁₁ and R₁₁ is selected from the group of H and (C₁-C₄)alkyl. Non-limiting examples of (C₁-C₄)alkyl include methyl, ethyl, propyl, iso-propyl, butyl, sec-butyl, and tert-butyl.

In some embodiments, R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4.

In some embodiments, NR₁R₂, NR₃R₄, and NR_(b)R_(c) are each independently a heterocycle selected from

in which R_(d) is H, Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, t-Bu, CH₂CMe₃, Ph, CH₂Ph, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), wherein R₁₂ is alkyl, phenyl, or heterocycle; R_(a), R_(b) and R_(c) are each independently hydrogen, or (C₁-C₄)alkyl, or R_(b) and R_(c), together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic ring containing from three to seven ring atoms, which ring may optionally contain another heteroatom selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur and may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from the group consisting of alkyl, phenyl and benzyl; and p is 2-4.

In some embodiments, R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, (C₁-C₄)alkyl, hydroxy, (C₁-C₄)alkoxy, SR_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), in which R_(a), R_(b) and R_(c) are each independently hydrogen or (C₁-C₄)alkyl, or R_(b) and R_(c), together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic ring containing from three to seven ring atoms, which ring may optionally contain another heteroatom selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur and may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from the group consisting of alkyl, phenyl and benzyl. In some specific embodiments, R₆ is

in which R_(d) is H, Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, t-Bu, CH₂CMe₃, Ph, or CH₂Ph.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I has the structure of Formula V:

wherein

A is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle; and

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂ and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In some embodiments, R₅ is (C₁-C₄)alkyl or halogen. Non-limiting examples of (C₁-C₄)alkyl include Me, Et, Pr, i-Pr, Bu, sec-Bu, tert-Bu. In other embodiments, R₅ is halogenated (C₁-C₄)alkyl. Non-limiting examples of halogenated (C₁-C₄)alkyl include CFH₂, CF₂H, CF₃, CF₂CF₃, CF₂CFH₂, CF₂CHF₂, CF₂CH₃. In still other embodiments, R₅ is Ph or substituted phenyl group, wherein each of the 1-5 hydrogens is substituted by halogen, OH, amino, nitro, CF₃, or (C₁-C₄)alkyl. In some specific embodiments, R₅ is selected from the group consisting of Me, CF₃, Ph, 3,5-difluorophenyl, and 3,5-dichlorophenyl.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I has the structure of Formula VI:

wherein

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

each occurrence of R₃ or R₄ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I has the structure of Formula VII:

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

each occurrence of R₃ or R₄ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In one aspect, the present invention provides a compound selected from Examples 1 through 74 as described in Tables 1, 2, and 3. The enumerated compounds in Tables 1-3 are representative and non-limiting pteridine compounds of the invention.

TABLE 1 Selected pteridine compositions, wherein R₇ = NR₃R₄ Ex- ample No. X Q Y L R₃ R₄ R₅ R₆ 1

NH —(CH₂)₂—

H H 2

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ H H 3

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ H CH₃ 4 —(CH₂)₃—

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ CH₃ H 5

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ CH₃ CH₃ 6 —(CH₂)₄—

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃

CH₃ 7

H S —(CH₂)₂—

H

8

O —(CH₂)₂—

CH3 H 9

H NH —(CH₂)₂—

Br

10

H NH —(CH₂)₂—

Cl

11

NH —(CH₂)₂—

H SCH₃ 12

NH —(CH₂)₂—

H SO₂CH₃ 13 —(CH₂)₃—

NH —(CH₂)₂—

Cl OCH₃ 14

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ H OH 15

NH —(CH₂)₂—

H H 16

NH —(CH₂)₂—

CH₃ H 17

NH —(CH₂)₃—

H CH₃ 18

NH —(CH₂)₂—

H H 19

NH —(CH₂)₂—

H CH₃ 20

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ H H 21

NH —(CH₂)₃— CH₃ CH₃ H H 22

NH —(CH₂)₃— CH₃ CH₃ CH₃ CH₃ 23

NH —(CH₂)₃— CH₃ CH₃ H CH₃ 24

S —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ H

TABLE 2 Additional Selected pteridine compositions of the Invention Example No. X—Q Y L R₃ R₄ R₅ R₆ R₇ 25

O —(CH₂)₂— — — H H

26

S —(CH₂)₃—

H H NR₃R₄ 27

NH —(CH₂)₄— — — H CH₃

28

NH —(CH₂)₅— — — H H n-C₄H₉ 29

NH —(CH₂)₂— — — H CH₃

30

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₂CH₃ CH₂CH₃ H H NR₃R₄ 31

NH —(CH₂)₄— — — H CH₃

32

NH —(CH₂)₂— — — H H n-C₅H₁₁ 33

NH —(CH₂)₂— — — CH₃ CH₃

34

S —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ H H NR₃R₄ 35

NH —(CH₂)₃— CH₃ CH₃ H H NR₃R₄ 36

NH —(CH₂)₄—

CH₃ CH₃ NR₃R₄ 37 NH—(CH₂)₄—N(CH₃)₂ NH —(CH₂)₄—

CH₃ CH₃ NR₃R₄ 38

S —(CH₂)₂— — — CH₃ H n-C₄H₉ 39

NCH₃ —(CH₂)₂— — — H H

40

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ H

NR₃R₄ 41

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ H

NR₃R₄ 42

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ H

NR₃R₄ 43

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ H

NR₃R₄ 44

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ H H NR₃R₄ 45

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ CH₃ H

NR₃R₄ 46

NH —(CH₂)₂—

H H NR₃R₄ 47

NH —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ H H H NR₃R₄ 48

NCH₃ —(CH₂)₃— CH₂CH₃ CH₂CH₃ H H NR₃R₄ 49

NH —(CH₂)₂—

H H H NR₃R₄ 50

NH —(CH₂)₃—

H H H NR₃R₄ 51

NH —(CH₂)₂—

H H H NR₃R₄ 52

NH —(CH₂)₂—

CH₃ H H NR₃R₄ 53

NCH₃ —(CH₂)₂— CH₃ H H H NR₃R₄ 54

NH —(CH₂)₂—

Cl

NR₃R₄ 55

NH —(CH₂)₂—

H

NR₃R₄ 56

NH —(CH₂)₂—

NR₃R₄ 57

NH —(CH₂)₂—

NR₃R₄ 58

NH —(CH₂)₂—

NR₃R₄ 59

NH —(CH₂)₂— N/A

60

NH —(CH₂)₂— N/A

61

NH —(CH₂)₂— N/A

62

NH —CH₂— N/A

63

NCH₃ —(CH₂)₂— NR₃R₄ = NCH₃CH₃

NR₃R₄ 64

NH —(CH₂)₃— N/A

65

NH —(CH₂)₃— N/A

66

NH —(CH₂)₂—

NR₃R₄ 67

NH —(CH₂)₂—

NR₃R₄ 68

NH —(CH₂)₂—

NR₃R₄

TABLE 3 Additional Selected pteridine compositions of the Invention based on Formula V Example No. X—Q Y L/L′ R₃ R₄ R₅ A R_(7′)/R₇ 69

NH —(CH₂)₂—

CH₃ O NR₃R₄ 70

NH —(CH₂)₂—

O NR₃R₄ 71

NH —(CH₂)₂—

CF₃ O NR₃R₄ 72

NH —(CH₂)₂—

O NR₃R₄ 73

NH —(CH₂)₂—

O NR₃R₄ 74

NH —(CH₂)₂—

O NR₃R₄

In another aspect, the present invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one compound of formulae I-VII as described herein and a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier or diluent.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating an autoimmune disease in a mammalian species in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the mammalian species a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I,

wherein

Z is absent or present;

if Z is present, then

-   -   Z is L′-R₇;     -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a single bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a double bond; and     -   R₆ is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

if Z is absent, then

-   -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a double bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a single bond; and     -   R₆ is defined below;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating an autoimmune disease in a mammalian species in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the mammalian species a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula II,

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ is H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

m is 2-6;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating an autoimmune disease in a mammalian species in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the mammalian species a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula III,

wherein

R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ is H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

m is 2-6;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating an autoimmune disease in a mammalian species in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the mammalian species a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula IV,

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

n is 2-6;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating an autoimmune disease in a mammalian species in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the mammalian species a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula V,

wherein

A is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle; and

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂ and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating an autoimmune disease in a mammalian species in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the mammalian species a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula VI,

wherein

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

each occurrence of R₃ or R₄ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method for treating an autoimmune disease in a mammalian species in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the mammalian species a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula VII,

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

each occurrence of R₃ or R₄ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In certain embodiments, the pteridine composition is in the form a hydrate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt. The pteridine composition can be administered to the subject by any suitable route of administration, including, without limitation, oral and parenteral. Parenteral routes of administration are as described above with respect to substituted 4-primary amino pteridines.

In certain embodiments, the autoimmune disease is selected from cutaneous and systemic lupus erythematosus, insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, atherosclerosis, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, ankylosing spondylitis, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, Behget's syndrome, Goodpasture's syndrome, Graves' disease, Guillain-Barre syndrome, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, idiopathic thrombocytopenia, io myasthenia gravis, pernicious anemia, polyarteritis nodosa, polymyositis/dermatomyositis, primary biliary sclerosis, sarcoidosis, sclerosing cholangitis, Sjogren's syndrome, systemic sclerosis (scleroderma and CREST syndrome), Takayasu's arteritis, temporal arteritis, and Wegener's granulomatosis.

In some embodiments, the autoimmune disease is selected from the group consisting of systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, inflammatory bowel disease, Sjogren's syndrome, polymyositis, vasculitis, Wegener's granulomatosis, sarcoidosis, ankylosing spondylitis, Reiter's syndrome, psoriatic arthritis, and Behyet's syndrome. In one particular embodiment, the autoimmune disease is systemic lupus erythematosus. In another particular embodiment, the autoimmune disease is rheumatoid arthritis. In one particular embodiment the autoimmune disease is psoriasis. In yet another particular embodiment, the autoimmune disease is Sjogren's syndrome. In one embodiment, the subject is a human. In one embodiment the autoimmune disorder is an immune complex associated disease, as described above.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulation in a mammalian species in need thereof, comprising administering to the mammalian species a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I,

wherein

Z is absent or present;

if Z is present, then

-   -   Z is L′-R₇;     -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a single bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a double bond; and     -   R₆ is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

if Z is absent, then

-   -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a double bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a single bond; and     -   R₆ is defined below;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulation in a mammalian species in need thereof, comprising administering to the mammalian species a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of Formula II,

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ is H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

m is 2-6;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula III,

wherein

R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ is H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

m is 2-6;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula IV,

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

n is 2-6;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula V,

wherein

A is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle; and

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂ and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula VI,

wherein

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

each occurrence of R₃ or R₄ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula VII,

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

each occurrence of R₃ or R₄ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In some embodiments, the method of affecting TLR-mediated immunostimulation in a subject comprises administering to a subject having or at risk of developing TLR-mediated immunostimulation an effective amount of a compound of Formulae I-VII, as provided herein, to inhibit TLR-mediated immunostimulation in the subject.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I,

wherein

Z is absent or present;

if Z is present, then

-   -   Z is L′-R_(7′);     -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a single bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a double bond; and     -   R₆ is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

if Z is absent, then

-   -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a double bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a single bond; and     -   R₆ is defined below;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula II,

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ is H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′), are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

m is 2-6;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula III,

wherein

R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ is H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

m is 2-6;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula IV,

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

n is 2-6;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₅ and R₆ are independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula V,

wherein

A is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle; and

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂ and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula VI,

wherein

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

each occurrence of R₃ or R₄ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In yet another aspect, the present invention provides a method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula VII,

wherein

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

each occurrence of R₃ or R₄ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl.

In some embodiments, the method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling comprises contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of a compound of Formulae I-VII, as provided above, to inhibit TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling in response to a ligand for the TLR.

In some embodiments, the method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling comprises contacting an immune cell expressing a functional TLR with

(a) an effective amount of a TLR signal agonist to stimulate signaling by the TLR in absence of a pteridine composition, and

(b) an effective amount of a pteridine composition having structural Formula I, II, III, IV, V, or VI as described herein, to inhibit signaling by the TLR in response to the TLR signal agonist compared with the signaling by the TLR in response to the TLR signal agonist in absence of the pteridine composition.

In some specific embodiments, the pteridine composition used for inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling has a structure of Formula IV. In some specific embodiments, the pteridine composition is in the form a hydrate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt. In some specific embodiments, the method for inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling is performed in vitro or in vivo.

In some embodiments, the TLR is TLR9 and the TLR signal agonist is a TLR9 signal agonist. In these embodiments, the method is a method of inhibiting intracellular signaling by TLR9 in response to a TLR9 signal agonist. The TLR signal agonist in one embodiment is CpG DNA, which can be an oligodeoxynucleotide (ODN). In some embodiments, CpG ODN is ODN 2006. In other embodiments, CpG ODN belongs to any class of CpG ODN, including A-class (e.g., ODN 2216), B-class (e.g., ODN 2006), or C-class (e.g., ODN 2395).

In some embodiments, In one embodiment the TLR signal agonist is an immune complex that includes a nucleic acid.

In some embodiments, the method as described herein are useful for altering TLR-mediated signaling. The methods are used to alter TLR-mediated signaling in response to a suitable TLR ligand or TLR signaling agonist. For example, the methods can be used to treat any of variety of conditions involving autoimmunity, inflammation, allergy, asthma, graft rejection, graft-versus host disease (GvHD), infection, sepsis, cancer, and immunodeficiency. Generally, methods useful in the treatment of conditions involving autoimmunity, inflammation, allergy, asthma, graft rejection, and GvHD will employ small molecules that inhibit TLR-mediated signaling in response to a suitable TLR ligand or TLR signaling agonist. Generally, methods useful in the treatment of conditions involving infection, cancer, and immunodeficiency will employ small molecules that augment TLR-mediated signaling in response to a suitable TLR ligand. In some embodiments, the methods are used to inhibit or promote TLR-mediated signaling in response to a TLR ligand or TLR signaling agonist. In some embodiments, the methods are used to inhibit TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling in response to a TLR ligand or TLR signaling agonist. In some embodiments, the methods are used to inhibit or promote TLR-mediated immunostimulation in a subject. In some embodiments, the methods are used to inhibit TLR-mediated immunostimulation in a subject. In some embodiments, the methods are used to inhibit an immunostimulatory nucleic acid-associated response in a subject.

In some embodiments, the method useful for altering TLR-mediated signaling uses small molecule compositions of compounds of Formulae I-VII. The compositions of the invention are used to alter TLR-mediated signaling in response to a suitable TLR ligand or TLR signaling agonist. For example, the small molecules can be used in methods to treat any of a variety of conditions involving autoimmunity, inflammation, allergy, asthma, graft rejection, GvHD, infection, sepsis, cancer, and immunodeficiency. Generally, methods useful in the treatment of conditions involving autoimmunity, inflammation, allergy, asthma, graft rejection, and GvHD will employ small molecules that inhibit TLR-mediated signaling in response to a suitable TLR ligand or TLR signaling agonist. Generally, methods useful in the treatment of conditions involving infection, cancer, and immunodeficiency will employ small molecules that augment TLR-mediated signaling in response to a suitable TLR ligand. In some instances the molecules can be used in a method to inhibit or promote TLR-mediated signaling in response to a TLR ligand or TLR signaling agonist. In some instances the small molecules can be used in a method to inhibit TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling in response to a TLR ligand or TLR signaling agonist. In some embodiments, the small molecules are used in a method to inhibit or promote TLR-mediated immunostimulation in a subject. In some embodiments, the small molecules are used in a method to inhibit TLR-mediated immunostimulation in a subject. In some embodiments, the small molecules are used to inhibit an immunostimulatory nucleic acid-associated response in a subject.

Furthermore, the methods as described herein can be combined with administration of additional agents to achieve synergistic effect on TLR-mediated immunostimulation. More specifically, whereas the agents described herein have been discovered to affect TLRs directly and thus directly affect TLR-bearing cells, e.g., antigen-presenting cells (APCs), such agents can be used in conjunction with additional agents which affect non-APC immune cells, e.g., T lymphocytes (T cells). Such an approach effectively introduces an immunomodulatory intervention at two levels: innate immunity and acquired immunity. Since innate immunity is believed to initiate and support acquired immunity, the combination intervention is synergistic.

In yet another aspect, a method of inhibiting an immunostimulatory nucleic acid-associated response in a subject is provided. The method comprises administering to a subject in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of Formulae I-VII, as provided above, to inhibit an immunostimulatory nucleic acid-associated response in the subject.

In some embodiments, the subject being treated with the pteridine compounds as described herein has symptoms indicating an immune system disease. In other embodiments, the subject being treated with the pteridine compounds as described herein is free of any symptoms indicating an immune system disease.

In some embodiments, the TLR is TLR9. In some specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is an immunostimulatory nucleic acid. In other specific embodiments, the immunostimulatory nucleic acid is a CpG nucleic acid. In still other specific embodiments, the immunostimulatory nucleic acid a DNA containing immune complex.

In some embodiments, the TLR is TLR8. In some specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is a natural ligand for TLR8. In other specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is RNA. In still other specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is an immunostimulatory nucleic acid. In still other specific embodiments, the immunostimulatory nucleic acid is an RNA containing immune complex. In still other specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is an immunostimulatory imidazoquinoline. In still other specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is resiquimod (R848).

In some embodiments, the TLR is TLR7. In some specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is a natural ligand for TLR7. In other specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is an immunostimulatory nucleic acid. In one embodiment the ligand for the TLR is an RNA. In still other specific embodiments, the immunostimulatory nucleic acid is an RNA containing immune complex. In still other specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is an immunostimulatory imidazoquinoline. In still other specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is R848.

In some embodiments, the TLR is TLR3. In some specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is a double stranded RNA. In other specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is the immune complex as described herein. In still other specific embodiments, the ligand for the TLR is poly(I:C). In still other specific embodiments, the TLR is TLR9 and the TLR signal agonist is a TLR9 signal agonist. In still other specific embodiments, the TLR signal agonist is CpG DNA, which can be an oligodeoxynucleotide (ODN).

In some embodiments, the TLR signal agonist is an immune complex comprising a nucleic acid.

In yet another aspect, a method for inhibiting an immune response to an antigenic substance is provided. The method comprises contacting an immune cell expressing a functional Toll-like receptor with:

(a) an effective amount of an antigenic substance to stimulate an immune response to the antigenic substance in the absence of a pteridine composition, and

(b) an effective amount of a pteridine composition having structural Formulae I-VII, as defined above, to inhibit an immune response to the antigenic substance compared with the immune response to the antigenic substance in absence of the pteridine composition.

In some embodiments, the immune response is an innate immune response. In other embodiments, the immune response includes an adaptive immune response. In some specific embodiments, the pteridine composition is in the form a hydrate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt. In some specific embodiments, the method for inhibiting an immune response to an antigenic substance is performed in vitro or in vivo.

In some embodiments, the antigenic substance is an allergen. In other embodiments, the antigenic substance is an antigen that is or is derived from a microbial agent, including a bacterium, a virus, a fungus, or a parasite. In still other embodiments, the antigenic substance is a cancer antigen.

In certain embodiments, the functional TLR is naturally expressed by a cell. Non-limiting examples of cells expressing TLR include RPMI 8226 cell line.

In one embodiment, the cell naturally expresses functional TLR and is an isolated cell from human multiple myeloma cell line RPMI 8226 (ATCC CCL-155; American Type Culture Collection (ATCC), Manassas, Va.). This cell line was established from the peripheral blood of a 61 year old man at the time of diagnosis of multiple myeloma (IgG lambda type). Matsuoka Y et al. (1967) Proc Soc Exp Biol Med 125:1246-50. RPMI 8226 was previously reported as responsive to CpG nucleic acids as evidenced by the induction of IL-6 protein and IL-12p40 mRNA. Takeshita F et al. (2000) Eur J Immunol 30:108-16; Takeshita F et al. (2000) Eur J Immunol 30:1967-76. Takeshita et al. used the cell line solely to study promoter constructs in order to identify transcription factor binding sites important for CpG nucleic acid signaling. It is now known that RPMI 8226 cells secrete a number of other chemokines and cytokines including IL-8, IL-10 and IP-10 in response to immunostimulatory nucleic acids. Because this cell line expresses TLR9, through which immunostimulatory nucleic acids such as for example CpG nucleic acids mediate their effects, it is a suitable cell line for use in the methods of the invention relating to CpG nucleic acids as reference and test compounds, as well as to other TLR9 ligands.

Similar to peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs), the RPMI 8226 cell line has been observed to upregulate its cell surface expression of markers such as CD71, CD86 and HLA-DR in response to CpG nucleic acid exposure. This has been observed by flow cytometric analysis of the cell line. Accordingly, the methods provided herein can be structured to use appropriately selected cell surface marker expression as a readout, in addition to or in place of chemokine or cytokine production or other readouts described elsewhere herein.

The RPMI 8226 cell line has also been found to respond to certain small molecules including imidazoquinoline compounds. For example, incubation of RPMI 8226 cells with the imidazoquinoline compound R848 (resiquimod) induces IL-8, IL-10, and IP-10 production. It has recently been reported that R848 mediates its immunostimulatory effects through TLR7 and TLR8. The ability of RPMI 8226 to respond to R848 suggests that the RPMI 8226 cell line also expresses TLR7, as previously reported for normal human B cells.

The RPMI cell line can be used in unmodified form or in a modified form. In one embodiment, the RPMI 8226 cell is transfected with a reporter construct. Preferably, the cell is stably transfected with the reporter construct. The reporter construct generally includes a promoter, a coding sequence and a polyadenylation signal. The coding sequence can include a reporter sequence selected from the group consisting of an enzyme (e.g., luciferase, alkaline phosphatase, beta-galactosidase, chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT), secreted alkaline phosphatase, etc.), a bioluminescence marker (e.g., green fluorescent protein (GFP, U.S. Pat. No. 5,491,084), etc.), a surface-expressed molecule (e.g., CD25), a secreted molecule (e.g., IL-8, IL-12 p40, TNF-α, etc.), and other detectable protein products known to those of skill in the art. Preferably, the coding sequence encodes a protein having a level or an activity that is quantifiable.

In certain embodiments, the functional TLR is artificially expressed (including over-expressed) by a cell, for example by introduction into the cell of an expression vector bearing a coding sequence for the functional TLR wherein the coding sequence is operably linked to a gene expression sequence. As used herein, a coding sequence and the gene expression sequence are said to be operably linked when they are covalently linked in such a way as to place the expression or transcription and/or translation of the coding sequence under the influence or control of the gene expression sequence. Two DNA sequences are said to be operably linked if induction of a promoter in the 5′ gene expression sequence results in the transcription of the coding sequence and if the nature of the linkage between the two DNA sequences does not (1) result in the introduction of a frame-shift mutation, (2) interfere with the ability of the promoter region to direct the transcription of the coding sequence, or (3) interfere with the ability of the corresponding RNA transcript to be translated into a protein. Thus, a gene expression sequence would be operably linked to a coding sequence if the gene expression sequence were capable of effecting transcription of that coding sequence such that the resulting transcript is translated into the desired protein or polypeptide.

In some embodiments, a coding sequence refers to a nucleic acid sequence coding for a functional TLR. In some embodiments, a coding sequence refers to a nucleic acid sequence coding for a reporter.

A cell that artificially expresses a functional TLR can be a cell that does not express the functional TLR but for the TLR expression vector. For example, human 293 fibroblasts (ATCC CRL-1573) do not express TLR3, TLR7, TLR8, or TLR9. As described in the examples below, such cells can be transiently or stably transfected with suitable expression vector (or vectors) so as to yield cells that do express TLR3, TLR7, TLR8, TLR9, or any combination thereof. Alternatively, a cell that artificially expresses a functional TLR can be a cell that expresses the functional TLR at a significantly higher level with the TLR expression vector than it does without the TLR expression vector.

For use in the methods of the instant invention, a cell that artificially expresses a functional TLR is preferably a stably transfected cell that expresses the functional TLR. Such a cell can also be stably transfected with a suitable reporter construct.

Assays for Effectiveness

The methods of the invention can be assessed using any of a number of possible readout systems based upon a TLR/IL-1R signal transduction pathway. In some embodiments, the readout for the method is based on the use of native genes or, alternatively, transfected or otherwise artificially introduced reporter gene constructs which are responsive to the TLR/IL-1R signal transduction pathway involving MyD88, TRAF, p38, and/or ERK. Hacker H et al. (1999) EMBO J 18:6973-82. These pathways activate kinases including KB kinase complex and c-Jun N-terminal kinases. Thus reporter genes and reporter gene constructs particularly useful for the assays include, e.g., a reporter gene operably linked to a promoter sensitive to NF-κB. Examples of such promoters include, without limitation, those for NF-κB, IL-1β, IL-6, IL-8, IL-12 p40, IP-10, CD80, CD86, and TNF-α. The reporter gene operably linked to the TLR-sensitive promoter can include, without limitation, an enzyme (e.g., luciferase, alkaline phosphatase, β-galactosidase, chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT), etc.), a bioluminescence marker (e.g., green-fluorescent protein (GFP, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,491,084), blue fluorescent protein (BFP, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,486,382), etc.), a surface-expressed molecule (e.g., CD25, CD80, CD86), and/or a secreted molecule (e.g., IL-1, IL-6, IL-8, IL-12 p40, TNF-α). In certain embodiments the reporter is selected from IL-8, TNF-α, NF-κB-luciferase (NF-κB-luc; Hacker H et al. (1999) EMBO J 18:6973-82), IL-12 p40-luc (Murphy T L et al. (1995) Mol Cell Biol 15:5258-67), and TNF-luc (Häcker H et al. (1999) EMBO J 18:6973-82). In assays relying on enzyme activity readout, substrate can be supplied as part of the assay, and detection can involve measurement of chemiluminescence, fluorescence, color development, incorporation of radioactive label, drug resistance, or other marker of enzyme activity. For assays relying on surface expression of a molecule, detection can be accomplished using flow cytometry (e.g., FACS) analysis or functional assays. Secreted molecules can be assayed using enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) or bioassays. Many of these and other suitable readout systems are well known in the art and are commercially available.

Reporter Constructs

A cell expressing a functional TLR and useful for the methods of the invention has, in some embodiments, an expression vector including an isolated nucleic acid which encodes a reporter construct useful for detecting TLR signaling. The expression vector including an isolated nucleic acid which encodes a reporter construct useful for detecting TLR signaling can include a reporter gene under control of a promoter response element (enhancer element). In some embodiments, the promoter response element is associated with a minimal promoter responsive to a transcription factor believed by the applicant to be activated as a consequence of TLR signaling. Examples of such minimal promoters include, without limitation, promoters for the following genes: AP-1, NF-κB, ATF2, IRF3, and IRF7. These minimal promoters contain corresponding promoter response elements sensitive to AP-1, NF-κB, ATF2, IRF3, and IRF7, respectively. In other embodiments the expression vector including an isolated nucleic acid which encodes a reporter construct useful for detecting TLR signaling can include a gene under control of a promoter response element selected from response elements sensitive to IL-6, IL-8, IL-12 p40 subunit, a type I IFN, RANTES, TNF, IP-10, I-TAC, and interferon-stimulated response element (ISRE). The promoter response element generally will be present in multiple copies, e.g., as tandem repeats. For example, in one reporter construct, coding sequence for luciferase is under control of an upstream 6× tandem repeat of NF-κB response element. In some embodiments, an ISRE-luciferase reporter construct useful in the invention is available from Stratagene (catalog no. 219092) and includes a 5×ISRE tandem repeat joined to a TATA box upstream of a luciferase reporter gene. As described herein, the reporter itself can be any gene product suitable for detection by methods recognized in the art. Such methods for detection can include, for example, measurement of spontaneous or stimulated light emission, enzyme activity, expression of a soluble molecule, expression of a cell surface molecule, etc.

Readouts typically involve usual elements of Toll/IL-1R signaling, e.g., MyD88, TRAF, and IRAK molecules, although in the case of TLR3 the role of MyD88 is less clear than for other TLR family members. As described herein, such responses include the induction of a gene under control of a specific promoter such as a NF-κB promoter, increases in particular cytokine levels, increases in particular chemokine levels, etc. The gene under the control of the NF-κB promoter can be a gene which naturally includes an NF-κB promoter or it can be a gene in a construct in which an NF-κB promoter has been inserted. Genes and constructs which include the NF-κB promoter include but are not limited to IL-8, IL-12 p40, NF-κB-luc, IL-12 p40-luc, and TNF-luc.

Increases in cytokine levels can result from increased production, increased stability, increased secretion, or any combination of the forgoing, of the cytokine in response to the TLR-mediated signaling. Cytokines generally include, without limitation, IL-1, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-10, IL-11, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-18, IFN-α, IFN-β, IFN-γ, TNF-α, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF. Th1 cytokines include but are not limited to IL-2, IFN-γ, and IL-12. Th2 cytokines include but are not limited to IL-4, IL-5, and IL-10.

Increases in chemokine levels can result from increased production, increased stability, increased secretion, or any combination of the forgoing, of the chemokine in response to the TLR-mediated signaling. Chemokines of particular significance in the invention include but are not limited to CCL5 (RANTES), CXCL9 (Mig), CXCL10 (IP-10), and CXCL11 (I-TAC), IL-8, and MCP-1.

Abbreviations

-   ACN Acetonitrile -   EA Ethyl acetate -   DMF Dimethyl formamide -   PE Petroleum ether -   DCM Dichloromethane -   THF Tetrahydrofuran -   HOBT 1-Hydroxybenzotriazole -   EDCI 1-Ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide -   HBTU 2-(1H-Benzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium     hexafluorophosphate -   HATU     N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-1,2,3-triazolelo(4,4-b)pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methylmethaneaminium     hexafluorophosphate -   PyBOP     1H-Benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphoniumhexafluorophosphate -   BOPCl Bis(2-oxo-3-oxazolidinyl)phosphinic chloride -   BOP Benzotriazol-1-yloxytris(diethylamino)phosphonium     hexafluorophospahte -   TEA Triethylamine -   DIPEA Diisopropylethylamine -   DMAP 4-Dimethylaminopyridine -   PCC Pyridinium chlorochromate -   PDC Pyridinium dichromate -   NBS N-bromosuccinimide -   NCS N-chlorosuccinimide -   NIS N-iodosuccinimide -   9-BBN 9-Borabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane -   TsOH p-Toluenesulfonic acid -   TFA Trifluoroacetamide -   CDI Carbonyldiimidazole

Methods of Preparation

Following are general synthetic schemes for manufacturing compounds of the present invention. These schemes are illustrative and are not meant to limit the possible techniques one skilled in the art any use to manufacture compounds disclosed herein. Different methods will be evident to those skilled in the art. Additionally, the various steps in the synthesis may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compound(s). All documents cited herein are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. For example, the following reactions are illustrations but not limitations of the preparation of some of the starting materials and examples used herein.

Schemes 1-5 describe various methods for the synthesis of intermediates that may be used to prepare compounds of the present invention. Various modifications to these methods may be envisioned by those skilled in the art to achieve similar results to that of the inventors given below.

Pteridine compound VI′ may be prepared as shown in Scheme 1.

Step 1

Amide I′ may be acylated using benzoyl chloride II′, in the presence of base such as triethylamine and diisopropylethylamine and optionally with the addition of dimethylaminopyridine to afford benzoyl amide III′. Suitable solvent for this reaction includes methylene chloride, acetonitrile, chloroform, and tetrahydrofuran.

Step 2

Reaction of benzoyl amide III′ with base such as NaOH, KOH, or CsOH, affords pteridin-4(3H)-one IV′. Suitable solvent for this reaction includes DMSO, ethanol, and water.

Step 3

Reaction of pteridin-4(3H)-one IV′ with chlorinating agents such as phosphorous oxychloride or thionyl chloride affords chloro-pteridine V′. Suitable solvent for this reaction includes methylene chloride chloroform or toluene.

Step 4

Treatment of chloro-pteridine V′ with nuclephile R₇LY, in the presence of a base, such as sodium hydride, potassium carbonate, triethylamine, and diisopropylethylamine, and optionally using a catalyst such as Pd(0), affords Pteridine compound VI′. Suitable solvent for this reaction includes chloroform, methylene chloride, toluene, and tetrahydrofuran.

Pteridine compound XII′ may be prepared as shown in Scheme 2.

Step 1

Amide I′ may be acylated using bromobenzoyl chloride VII′, in the presence of base such as triethylamine and diisopropylethylamine and optionally with the addition of dimethylaminopyridine to afford bromobenzoyl amide VIII′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include chloroform, methylene chloride, acetonitrile, and tetrahydrofuran.

Step 2

Reaction of bromobenzoyl amide VIII′ with base such as NaOH, KOH, or CsOH, affords bromophenylpteridin-4(3H)-one IX′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include DMSO, ethanol, water.

Step 3

Reaction of bromophenylpteridin-4(3H)-one IX′ with chlorinating agents such as phosphorous oxychloride or thionyl chloride affords chloro-phenylpteridine X′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include methylene chloride, chloroform and toluene.

Step 4

Treatment of chloro-phenylpteridine X′ with nuclephile R₇LYH, in the presence of a base, such as sodium hydride, potassium carbonate, triethylamine, and diisopropyethylamine, affords bromo-pteridine XI′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include tetrahydrofuran ethanol, and toluene.

Step 5

Treatment of bromo-pteridine XI′ with nuclephile NHR₁R₂, in the presence of a base, such as sodium tert-butoxide or cesium carbonate, and in the presence of a catalyst such as Pd(0), affords Pteridine compound XII′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include tetrahydrofuran and toluene.

Pteridine compound XIX′ may be prepared as shown in Scheme 3.

Step 1

Amide XIII′ may be acylated using benzoyl chloride II′, in the presence of base such as triethylamine and diisopropyethylamine and optionally with the addition of dimethylaminopyridine to afford benzoyl amide XIV′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include chloroform, methylene chloride, acetonitrile, and tetrahydrofuran.

Step 2

Reaction of benzoyl amide XIV′ with base such as NaOH, KOH, or CsOH, affords pteridin-4(3H)-one XV′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include DMSO, ethanol, water.

Step 3

Reaction of pteridin-4(3H)-one XV′ with nucleophile HR₅ in the presence of base such as triethylamine and diisopropyethylamine affords pteridin-4(3H)-one XVI′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include chloroform, ethanol, methylene chloride, acetonitrile, and tetrahydrofuran.

Step 4

Treatment of pteridin-4(3H)-one XVI′ with chlorinating agents such as phosphorous oxychloride or thionyl chloride affords chloro-pteridine XVII′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include methylene chloride, chloroform, and toluene.

Step 5

Treatment of chloro-pteridine XVII′ with nuclephile R₇LYH, in the presence of a base, such as sodium hydride, potassium carbonate, triethylamine, and diisopropyethylamine, affords pteridine XVIII′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include methylene chloride, acetonitrile, ethanol, toluene, and tetrahydrofuran.

Step 6

Treatment of pteridine XVIII′ with nuclephile HR₆, in the presence of a base, such as sodium hydride, potassium carbonate, triethylamine, and diisopropylethylamine, or a base such as sodium tert-butoxide or cesium carbonate in the presence of a catalyst such as Pd(0), affords Pteridine compound XIX′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include methylene chloride, acetonitrile, ethanol, toluene, ethanol, toluene, and tetrahydrofuran.

Pteridine compounds XXIV′ and XXV′ may be prepared as shown in Scheme 4.

Step 1

Reaction of 4,6-dichloro-5-nitropyrimidine XX′ with nucleophile NH₃ and R₇LYH affords amino-5-nitropyrimidine XXI′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include ethanol, methylene chloride, acetonitrile, and tetrahydrofuran.

Step 2

Reduction of amino-5-nitropyrimidine XXI′ with reducing agents such as H₂, hydrosulfite, and SnCl₂ affords diamino pyrimidine XXII′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include chloroform, ethanol, methylene chloride, acetonitrile, and tetrahydrofuran.

Step 3

Reaction of diamino pyrimidine XXII′ with

affords a mixture of pteridine compounds: XXIV′ and XXV′.

Pteridine compounds XXXIII′ may be prepared as shown in Scheme 5.

Step 1

Reaction of dihydroxypyrimidine XXVI″ with benzenediazonium affords (phenyldiazenyl)pyrimidine-diol XXVII′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include ethanol and water.

Step 2

Reaction of (phenyldiazenyl)pyrimidine-diol XXVII′ with cholorination reagent affords (phenyldiazenyl)pyrimidine-dichloride XXVIII′. Suitable chlorination reagents include POCl₃ and SOCl₂. Suitable solvents for this reaction include chloroform and methylene chloride. Alternatively, neat chlorination reagent may be used as the solvent. Bases may also be used. Suitable bases including triethylamine, and diisopropyethylamine.

Step 3

Reaction of (phenyldiazenyl)pyrimidine-dichloride XXVIII′ with nucleophile XXIX′ in the presence of a base, such as sodium hydride, potassium carbonate, triethylamine, and diisopropyethylamine, affords compound XXX′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include tetrahydrofuran, ethanol, and toluene.

Step 4

Reduction of compound XXX′ affords compound XXXI′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include tetrahydrofuran, ethanol, and toluene. Reduction maybe achieved using hydrogen or ammonium formate. Catalyst ushc as Pd(0) maybe be used.

Step 5

Condensation reaction of compound XXXI′ with pyruvate XXXII′ affords compound XXXI′. Suitable solvents for this reaction include tetrahydrofuran, ethanol, propanol, n-butanol, 2-butanol, and toluene. Heating may be used.

In addition, other compounds of formulae I-VII may be prepared by the procedures generally known to those skilled in the art. In particular, the following examples provide additional methods for preparing compounds of this invention.

The invention will now be further described by the working examples as below, which are preferred embodiments of the invention. These examples are illustrated rather than limiting, and it is to be understood that there may be other embodiments that fall within the spirit and scope of the invention as defined by the claims appended hereto.

Pharmaceutical Compositions

This invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one of the compounds as described herein or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt or solvate thereof, and a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier.

In yet another aspect, a pharmaceutical composition is described, comprising at least one a compound of Formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier or diluent,

wherein

Z is absent or present;

if Z is present, then

-   -   Z is L′-R_(7′);     -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a single bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a double bond; and     -   R₆ is ═O, ═S, or ═NR₃;

if Z is absent, then

-   -   the bond between NZ and C₁ is a double bond;     -   the bond between C₁ and R₆ is a single bond; and     -   R₆ is defined below;

X is absent or is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, SR₁, or CR₁R₂R_(2′), in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4;

R₁, R₂, and R_(2′) are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), in which p is 2-4;

R₇ and R_(7′) are each independently H, alkyl, heteroaryl,

or NR₃R₄, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino; and R_(a′), R_(b′), and R_(c′) are each independently (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; wherein the heteroaryl or aryl is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl, halogen, or amino;

Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group;

R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle;

L and L′ are each independently alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms;

R₅ and R₆ are each independently hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, CF₃, OCF₃, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, heterocycle, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c);

each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and

each occurrence of R_(b), and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl;

provided that when R₅ and R₆ are H or methyl, then Q is not H.

The phrase “pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier” as used herein means a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject pharmaceutical agent from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body. Each carrier must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers include: sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; powdered tragacanth; malt; gelatin; talc; excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; glycols, such as butylene glycol; polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; agar; buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; alginic acid; pyrogen-free water; isotonic saline; Ringer's solution; ethyl alcohol; phosphate buffer solutions; and other non-toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical formulations. The term “carrier” denotes an organic or inorganic ingredient, natural or synthetic, with which the active ingredient is combined to facilitate the application. The components of the pharmaceutical compositions also are capable of being comingled with the compounds of the present invention, and with each other, in a manner such that there is no interaction which would substantially impair the desired pharmaceutical efficiency.

As set out above, certain embodiments of the present pharmaceutical agents may be provided in the form of pharmaceutically-acceptable salts. The term “pharmaceutically-acceptable salt”, in this respect, refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds of the invention, or by separately reacting a purified compound of the invention in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed. Representative salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, valerate, oleate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tartrate, napthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, and laurylsulphonate salts and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al., (1977) “Pharmaceutical Salts”, J. Pharm. Sci. 66:1-19.)

The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the subject compounds include the conventional nontoxic salts or quaternary ammonium salts of the compounds, e.g., from non-toxic organic or inorganic acids. For example, such conventional nontoxic salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloride, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric, and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, butionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, palmitic, maleic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isothionic, and the like.

In other cases, the compounds of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable bases. The term “pharmaceutically-acceptable salts” in these instances refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic base addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can likewise be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds, or by separately reacting the purified compound in its free acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine. Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and aluminum salts and the like. Representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al., supra.)

Wetting agents, emulsifiers and lubricants, such as sodium lauryl sulfate, magnesium stearate, and polyethylene oxide-polybutylene oxide copolymer as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.

Formulations of the present invention include those suitable for oral, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal and/or parenteral administration. The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host being treated, the particular mode of administration. The amount of active ingredient, which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect. Generally, out of 100%, this amount will range from about 1% to about 99% of active ingredient, preferably from about 5% to about 70%, most preferably from about 10% to about 30%.

Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the step of bringing into association a compound of the present invention with the carrier and, optionally, one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association a compound of the present invention with liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.

Formulations of the invention suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouthwashes and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the present invention as an active ingredient. A compound of the present invention may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.

In solid dosage forms of the invention for oral administration (capsules, tablets, pills, dragees, powders, granules and the like), the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; humectants, such as glycerol; disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, sodium carbonate, and sodium starch glycolate; solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; wetting agents, such as, for example, cetyl alcohol, glycerol monostearate, and polyethylene oxide-polybutylene oxide copolymer; absorbents, such as kaolin and bentonite clay; lubricants, such a talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof; and coloring agents. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise buffering agents. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.

A tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxybutylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets, may be, made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.

The tablets, and other solid dosage forms of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, such as dragees, capsules, pills and granules, may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art. They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxybutylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres. They may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions, which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use. These compositions may also optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions, which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. The active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients.

Liquid dosage forms for oral administration of the compounds of the invention include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, micro emulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active ingredient, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isobutyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, butylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Additionally, cyclodextrins, e.g., hydroxybutyl-β-cyclodextrin, may be used to solubilize compounds.

Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.

Suspensions, in addition to the active compounds, may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar--agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.

Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more compounds of the invention with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active pharmaceutical agents of the invention.

Formulations of the present invention which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.

Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants. The active compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.

The ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound of this invention, excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.

Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to a compound of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and butane.

Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound of the present invention to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving, or dispersing the pharmaceutical agents in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the pharmaceutical agents of the invention across the skin. The rate of such flux can be controlled, by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.

Ophthalmic formulations, eye ointments, powders, solutions and the like, are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.

Pharmaceutical compositions of this invention suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more compounds of the invention in combination with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.

In some cases, in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material having poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution, which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally-administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle. One strategy for depot injections includes the use of polyethylene oxide-polybutylene oxide copolymers wherein the vehicle is fluid at room temperature and solidifies at body temperature.

Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsuled matrices of the subject compounds in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly (orthoesters) and poly (anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or micro emulsions, which are compatible with body tissue.

When the compounds of the present invention are administered as pharmaceuticals, to humans and animals, they can be given per se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1% to 99.5% (more preferably, 0.5% to 90%) of active ingredient in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

The compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can be employed in combination therapies, that is, the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions can be administered concurrently with, prior to, or subsequent to, one or more other desired therapeutics or medical procedures. The particular combination of therapies (therapeutics or procedures) to employ in a combination regimen will take into account compatibility of the desired therapeutics and/or procedures and the desired therapeutic effect to be achieved. It will also be appreciated that the therapies employed may achieve a desired effect for the same disorder (for example, the compound of the present invention may be administered concurrently with another anti-inflammatory or immunosuppressant agent); such as but not limited to NSAIDS, DMARDS, Steroids, or biologics such as antibody therapies) or they may achieve different effects (e.g., control of any adverse effects).

The compounds of the invention may be administered intravenously, intramuscularly, intraperitoneally, subcutaneously, topically, orally, or by other acceptable means. The compounds may be used to treat arthritic conditions in mammals (e.g., humans, livestock, and domestic animals), birds, lizards, and any other organism, which can tolerate the compounds.

The invention also provides a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the ingredients of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention. Optionally associated with such container(s) can be a notice in the form prescribed by a governmental agency regulating the manufacture, use or sale of pharmaceuticals or biological products, which notice reflects approval by the agency of manufacture, use or sale for human administration.

Administration to a Subject

Some aspects of the invention involve administering an effective amount of a composition to a subject to achieve a specific outcome. The small molecule compositions useful according to the methods of the present invention thus can be formulated in any manner suitable for pharmaceutical use.

The formulations of the invention are administered in pharmaceutically acceptable solutions, which may routinely contain pharmaceutically acceptable concentrations of salt, buffering agents, preservatives, compatible carriers, adjuvants, and optionally other therapeutic ingredients.

For use in therapy, an effective amount of the compound can be administered to a subject by any mode allowing the compound to be taken up by the appropriate target cells. “Administering” the pharmaceutical composition of the present invention can be accomplished by any means known to the skilled artisan. Specific routes of administration include but are not limited to oral, transdermal (e.g., via a patch), parenteral injection (subcutaneous, intradermal, intramuscular, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, etc.), or mucosal (intranasal, intratracheal, inhalation, intrarectal, intravaginal, etc.). An injection can be in a bolus or a continuous infusion.

For example the pharmaceutical compositions according to the invention are often administered by intravenous, intramuscular, or other parenteral means, or by biolistic “gene-gun” application to the epidermis. They can also be administered by intranasal application, inhalation, topically, orally, or as implants, and even rectal or vaginal use is possible. Suitable liquid or solid pharmaceutical preparation forms are, for example, aqueous or saline solutions for injection or inhalation, microencapsulated, encochleated, coated onto microscopic gold particles, contained in liposomes, nebulized, aerosols, pellets for implantation into the skin, or dried onto a sharp object to be scratched into the skin. The pharmaceutical compositions also include granules, powders, tablets, coated tablets, (micro)capsules, suppositories, syrups, emulsions, suspensions, creams, drops or preparations with protracted release of active compounds, in whose preparation excipients and additives and/or auxiliaries such as disintegrants, binders, coating agents, swelling agents, lubricants, flavorings, sweeteners or solubilizers are customarily used as described above. The pharmaceutical compositions are suitable for use in a variety of drug delivery systems. For a brief review of present methods for drug delivery, see Langer R (1990) Science 249:1527-33, which is incorporated herein by reference.

The concentration of compounds included in compositions used in the methods of the invention can range from about 1 nM to about 100 μM. Effective doses are believed to range from about 10 picomole/kg to about 100 micromole/kg.

The pharmaceutical compositions are preferably prepared and administered in dose units. Liquid dose units are vials or ampoules for injection or other parenteral administration. Solid dose units are tablets, capsules, powders, and suppositories. For treatment of a patient, depending on activity of the compound, manner of administration, purpose of the administration (i.e., prophylactic or therapeutic), nature and severity of the disorder, age and body weight of the patient, different doses may be necessary. The administration of a given dose can be carried out both by single administration in the form of an individual dose unit or else several smaller dose units. Repeated and multiple administration of doses at specific intervals of days, weeks, or months apart are also contemplated by the invention.

The compositions can be administered per se (neat) or in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. When used in medicine the salts should be pharmaceutically acceptable, but non-pharmaceutically acceptable salts can conveniently be used to prepare pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. Such salts include, but are not limited to, those prepared from the following acids: hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulphuric, nitric, phosphoric, maleic, acetic, salicylic, p-toluene sulphonic, tartaric, citric, methane sulphonic, formic, malonic, succinic, naphthalene-2-sulphonic, and benzene sulphonic. Also, such salts can be prepared as alkaline metal or alkaline earth salts, such as sodium, potassium or calcium salts of the carboxylic acid group.

Suitable buffering agents include: acetic acid and a salt (1-2% w/v); citric acid and a salt (1-3% w/v); boric acid and a salt (0.5-2.5% w/v); and phosphoric acid and a salt (0.8-2% w/v). Suitable preservatives include benzalkonium chloride (0.003-0.03% w/v); chlorobutanol (0.3-0.9% w/v); parabens (0.01-0.25% w/v) and thimerosal (0.004-0.02% w/v).

Compositions suitable for parenteral administration conveniently include sterile aqueous preparations, which can be isotonic with the blood of the recipient. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents are water, Ringer's solution, phosphate buffered saline, and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed mineral or non-mineral oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectables. Carrier formulations suitable for subcutaneous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, etc. administrations can be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa.

The compounds useful in the invention can be delivered in mixtures of more than two such compounds. A mixture can further include one or more adjuvants in addition to the combination of compounds.

A variety of administration routes is available. The particular mode selected will depend, of course, upon the particular compound selected, the age and general health status of the subject, the particular condition being treated, and the dosage required for therapeutic efficacy. The methods of this invention, generally speaking, can be practiced using any mode of administration that is medically acceptable, meaning any mode that produces effective levels of response without causing clinically unacceptable adverse effects. Preferred modes of administration are discussed above.

The compositions can conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and can be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. All methods include the step of bringing the compounds into association with a carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the compositions are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing the compounds into association with a liquid carrier, a finely divided solid carrier, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.

Other delivery systems can include time-release, delayed release or sustained release delivery systems. Such systems can avoid repeated administrations of the compounds, increasing convenience to the subject and the physician. Many types of release delivery systems are available and known to those of ordinary skill in the art. They include polymer base systems such as poly(lactide-glycolide), copolyoxalates, polycaprolactones, polyesteramides, polyorthoesters, polyhydroxybutyric acid, and polyanhydrides. Microcapsules of the foregoing polymers containing drugs are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,075,109. Delivery systems also include non-polymer systems that are: lipids including sterols such as cholesterol, cholesterol esters and fatty acids or neutral fats such as mono-di- and tri-glycerides; hydrogel release systems; silastic systems; peptide based systems; wax coatings; compressed tablets using conventional binders and excipients; partially fused implants; and the like. Specific examples include, but are not limited to: (a) erosional systems in which an agent of the invention is contained in a form within a matrix such as those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,452,775, 4,675,189, and 5,736,152, and (b) diffusional systems in which an active component permeates at a controlled rate from a polymer such as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,854,480, 5,133,974 and 5,407,686. In addition, pump-based hardware delivery systems can be used, some of which are adapted for implantation.

EQUIVALENTS

The representative examples which follow are intended to help illustrate the invention, and are not intended to, nor should they be construed to, limit the scope of the invention. Indeed, various modifications of the invention and many further embodiments thereof, in addition to those shown and described herein, will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the full contents of this document, including the examples which follow and the references to the scientific and patent literature cited herein. It should further be appreciated that the contents of those cited references are incorporated herein by reference to help illustrate the state of the art. The following examples contain important additional information, exemplification and guidance which can be adapted to the practice of this invention in its various embodiments and equivalents thereof.

EXAMPLES Example 1

A slurry of 3-amino-2-pyrazinecarboxylic acid (15 gm, 0.108 moles) in dry methanol (250 mL) was stirred as concentrated sulfuric acid (10 mL, 18.4 gm, 0.188 moles) was added. The addition of the acid caused most of the solid to dissolve. The mixture was stirred at reflux, causing the formation of a clear yellow solution. This solution was stirred at reflux for 5 hours and was then stored at room temperature overnight. The solution was diluted with methylene chloride (500 mL) and was stirred as a solution of potassium carbonate (26 gm, 0.188 moles) in water (75 mL) was slowly added. After stirring for 15 minutes, the organic phase was separated from the aqueous phase and was dried over magnesium sulfate. After filtration to remove the drying agent, the solvents were removed under reduced pressure. The solid residue was recrystallized from isopropyl alcohol to provide the methyl ester as a tan powder in a yield of 7.22 gm (43.7%).

2-Aminopyrazinecarboxylic acid methyl ester (2.2 gm, 0.0144 moles) and 4-bromobenzoyl chloride (11.0 gm, 0.05 moles) were combined in chloroform (50 mL) and pyridine (8 mL) was added. This mixture was stirred at 50° C. overnight. TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride) showed that an appreciable amount of the 2-aminopyrazinecarboxylic acid methyl ester was left. Additional portions of 4-bromo-benzoyl chloride (5.5.0 gm, 0.025 moles) and pyridine (4 mL) were added and heating was continued at 65° C. overnight. TLC showed that all of the 2-aminopyrazinecarboxylic acid methyl ester had been consumed. The solution was cooled and methanol (25 mL) was added. After stirring for 30 minutes, the solvents were removed under reduced pressure. The solid residue was recrystallized from n-butanol.

The solid methyl ester (from above) was suspended in a mixture of methanol (50 mL) and tetrahydrofuran (50 mL). This mixture was heated to boiling to provide a clear pale orange solution. The heat was removed and concentrated aqueous ammonia (25 mL) was slowly added. This solution was stirred without heating and within a few minutes, a solid began to separate. After stirring for 2 hours the mixture had cooled to room temperature and TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride) showed formation of a new product spot. The mixture was filtered and the solid was washed with ether and dried. Yield=4.4 gm (95%) from 2-aminopyrazine-3-carboxylic acid methyl ester.

To a solution of potassium hydroxide (3.8 gm, 0.058 moles) in water (60 mL) and DMSO (20 mL) was added the benzamide (2.18 gm, 6.8×10⁻³ moles). This mixture was warmed slightly to help dissolution of the solid benzamide after which the clear yellow solution was stirred at room temperature for 45 minutes. An aliquot of the reaction solution was acidified with acetic acid and examined by TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride). The starting material (rf=0.55) had been cleanly converted to a single new product (rf=0.43). The reaction was acidified to a pH of about 5.0 with acetic acid which caused the precipitation of product. Ice (50 gm) was added and the slurry was stirred until the ice had melted. The solid product was isolated by filtration and was washed well with water. After drying the yield was 2.06 gm (100%)

A suspension of the pteridinone (2.06 gm, 6.8×10⁻³ moles) in chloroform (50 mL) was stirred as thionyl chloride (4.05 gm, 2.48 mL, 0.034 moles) and DMF (1.0 mL) were added. This mixture was stirred at reflux for 1 hour. The clear yellow solution which had formed was examined by TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride). The starting material (rf=0.43) had been cleanly converted to a single new product (rf=0.87). After cooling, the solvents were stripped under vacuum and the solid yellow residue was triturated in diethyl ether. This material was used for the next step without further purification.

The chloropteridine from above was suspended in n-butanol (25 mL) and N-2-aminoethylmorpholine (1.77 gm, 1.78 mL, 1.36×10⁻² moles) was added. This mixture was then heated at reflux for 30 minutes. After cooling, the butanol was evaporated under vacuum to give a pale yellow solid. This was partitioned between ethyl acetate (200 mL) and 5% sodium bicarbonate solution (200 mL). The ethyl acetate layer was isolated and was washed with 5% sodium bicarbonate solution (100 mL). Then the ethyl acetate solution was extracted with 5% HCl solution (2×50 mL). The combined acidic washes were backwashed with ethyl acetate (100 mL) and were then made basic by the addition of solid potassium carbonate. The precipitated solid was extracted into methylene chloride (2×100 mL) and the combined extracts were dried over magnesium sulfate. After filtration to remove the magnesium sulfate, the methylene chloride was evaporated under reduced pressure to give the product as a tan solid. This was purified by chromatography on silica using 5% methanol in methylene chloride as eluent. The fraction containing the product gave a tan solid that weighed 1.6 gm (57% from the pteridinone) after evaporation of the solvents. The NMR of this fraction confirmed that it was the desired compound. It can be recrystallized from toluene.

A second run started with 2.16 gm (7.13×10⁻³ moles) of the hydroxyl compound. Chlorination was run as before with thionyl chloride/DMF in chloroform. Work-up: After cooling, the reaction solution was diluted with methylene chloride (100 mL) and this solution was washed with 10% sodium bicarbonate solution (200 mL). After drying (MgSO4) the solution was filtered and the solvents were evaporated under vacuum. The residual solid was dissolved in chloroform (100 mL) and N-2-amino-ethylmorpholine (1.89 gm, 1.9 mL, 1.45×10⁻² moles) was added. This mixture was then heated at reflux for 30 minutes. After cooling, methylene chloride (200 mL) was added and this solution was washed with 5% sodium bicarbonate solution (200 mL). The methylene chloride layer was isolated and was extracted with 5% HCl solution (2×50 mL). The combined acidic washes were backwashed with methylene chloride (100 mL) and were then made basic by the addition of solid potassium carbonate. The precipitated solid was extracted into methylene chloride (2×100 mL) and the combined extracts were dried over magnesium sulfate. After filtration to remove the magnesium sulfate, the methylene chloride was evaporated under reduced pressure to a volume of about 5 mL. Ethyl ether (100 mL) was added and the product quickly crystallized. The solid was isolated by filtration, washed with ether and dried. The yield was 1.87 gm (63%) from the hydroxyl compound.

A 250 mL round bottom flask, equipped with a stir bar was dried in an oven and then cooled under nitrogen. To the cooled flask was added tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (0) (22.8 mg, 2.5×10⁻⁵ moles), +/−binap (46.6 mg, 7.5×10⁻⁵ moles), sodium t-butoxide (0.675 gm, 7×10⁻³ moles) and toluene (25 mL). The flask was again flushed with nitrogen and the bromopteridine (1.81 gm, 4.36×10⁻³ moles) and N-methylpiperazine (0.600 gm, 6.0×10⁻³ moles) were added. This mixture was stirred at 90° C. overnight. After cooling the reaction mixture was poured into a separatory funnel containing water (100 mL) and methylene chloride (100 mL). The organic extracts were washed with water and were then dried over magnesium sulfate. After filtration to remove the drying agent, the organic solvents were removed under vacuum. The residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel using 15% methanol in methylene chloride as eluent. The fractions containing the product were pooled and evaporated to give the product (Example 1) as an orange solid. Yield was 155 mg (8.2%). ¹H NMR: 2.81 ppm, singlet, 3H; 3.25 ppm, triplet, 6H; 3.6 ppm, multiplet, 8H; 4.1 ppm, multiplet, 2H; 4.25 ppm, triplet, 2H; 4.6, multiplet, 2H; 7.1 ppm, doublet, 2H; 8.1 ppm, doublet, 2H; 8.8 ppm, singlet, 1H; 8.9 ppm, singlet, 1H. LC/MS: M+1=435.35.

Hydrochloride salt formation: the pteridine (43 mg, 1×10⁻⁴ moles) was dissolved in boiling ethanol. To this yellow solution was added concentrated hydrochloric acid (30 μL). The solution was cooled which caused the tris-hydrochloride salt to crystallize as an orange solid. This was isolated by filtration and was washed with ethanol followed by diethyl ether. The solid salt was dried under vacuum. Yield=22.5 mg, Mw=543.91.

Examples 54 and 55

Methyl 3-amino-5,6-dichloro-2-pyrazinecarboxylate, (3.2 gm, 0.0144 moles) and benzoyl chloride (7.03 gm, 0.05 moles) are combined in chloroform (50 mL) and pyridine (8 mL) is added. This mixture is stirred at 50° C. overnight. Additional portions of benzoyl chloride (3.5.0 gm, 0.025 moles) and pyridine (4 mL) are added and heating is continued at 65° C. overnight. The solution is cooled and methanol (25 mL) is added. After stirring for 30 minutes, the solvents are removed under reduced pressure. The solid residue is recrystallized from n-butanol.

A suspension of the dichlorocompound (2.6 gm, 8.0×10⁻³ moles) in 2-propanol (25 mL) is stirred and treated with N-methylpiperazine (4.0 gm, 4.43 mL, 0.04 moles). This mixture is heated at reflux for one hour. Upon cooling on ice, the product can be crystallized and is isolated by filtration.

The solid methyl ester (2.96 gm, 7.6×10⁻³ moles) is suspended in a mixture of methanol (50 mL) and tetrahydrofuran (50 mL). This mixture is heated to boiling to provide a clear pale orange solution. The heat is removed and concentrated aqueous ammonia (25 mL) is slowly added. This solution is stirred without heating and within a few minutes, a solid begins to separate. After stirring for 2 hours the mixture is cooled to room temperature and TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride) can be used to show the formation of a new product spot. The mixture is filtered and the solid is washed with ether and dried.

To a solution of potassium hydroxide (4.0 gm, 0.06 moles) in water (60 mL) and DMSO (20 mL) is added the benzamide (2.7 gm, 7.2×10⁻³ moles). This mixture is warmed slightly to help dissolution of the solid benzamide after which the clear yellow solution is stirred at room temperature for 45 minutes. An aliquot of the reaction solution is acidified with acetic acid and examined by TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride). The reaction is acidified to a pH of about 5.0 with acetic acid which causes the precipitation of product. Ice (50 gm) is added and the slurry is stirred until the ice melts. The solid product is isolated by filtration and is washed well with water.

A suspension of the pteridinone (2.06 gm, 6.8×10⁻³ moles) in chloroform (50 mL) is stirred as thionyl chloride (4.05 gm, 2.48 mL, 0.034 moles) and DMF (1.0 mL) are added. This mixture is stirred at reflux for 1 hour After cooling, the chloroform solution is washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate solution and is then dried over magnesium sulfate. The chloroform solution is filtered and the solvents are stripped under vacuum to give a solid yellow residue which is triturated in diethyl ether. This material is used for the next step without further purification.

The chlorinated pteridine from above is dissolved in chloroform (100 mL) and N-2-amino-ethylmorpholine (1.89 gm, 1.9 mL, 1.45×10⁻² moles) is added. This mixture is then heated at reflux for 30 minutes. After cooling, methylene chloride (200 mL) is added and this solution is washed with 5% sodium bicarbonate solution (200 mL). The methylene chloride layer is isolated and is extracted with 5% HCl solution (2×50 mL). The combined acidic washes are backwashed with methylene chloride (100 mL) and are then made basic by the addition of solid potassium carbonate. The precipitated solid is extracted into methylene chloride (2×100 mL) and the combined extracts are dried over magnesium sulfate. After filtration to remove the magnesium sulfate, the methylene chloride is evaporated under reduced pressure to a volume of about 5 mL. Ethyl ether (100 mL) is added and the product quickly crystallized. The solid is isolated by filtration, washed with ether and dried.

A 250 mL Parr hydrogenation bottle is charged with chloride (468 mg, 1.0×10⁻³ moles), ethanol (50 mL), sodium acetate (1.0 gm) and 10% palladium on carbon (500 mg). This mixture is hydrogenated at an initial hydrogen pressure of 50 PSI overnight. The Parr bottle is flushed with nitrogen and the contents were heated to boiling. The catalyst is removed by filtration of the hot mixture and the catalyst is washed with boiling ethanol (10 mL). The combined filtrates are concentrated under vacuum to about 10 mL and are then cooled on ice. The solid which separated is isolated by filtration and was dried under vacuum. LC/MS: M+1=435.4.

Example 56

The dichloropteridine (1.37 gm, 3.64×10⁻³ moles) and N-(2-aminoethyl)morpholine (1.0 gm, 7.68×10⁻³ moles) were added to 2-propanol (15 mL) and this mixture was heated at 60° C. Diisopropylethylamine (0.94 gm, 7.28×10⁻³ moles) was added and heating was continued overnight. TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride) showed remaining dichloropteridine so additional N-(2-aminoethyl)morpholine (1.0 gm, 7.68×10⁻³ moles) was added. The temperature was increased to 85° C. for 2 hours and then the reaction was kept at room temperature overnight. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the remaining material was purified by chromatography on silica using 20% methanol in methylene chloride. The fractions containing the product were pooled and evaporated under reduced pressure. The remaining material was dissolved in ethanol (40 mL) and diethyl ether (100 mL). To this solution was added concentrated hydrochloric acid (500 μL). The solid hydrochloride salt separated and was isolated by filtration. After washing with diethyl ether and drying there was obtained 400 mg of product as a yellow powder. ¹H NMR: 2.4 ppm, singlet, 3H, 2.7 ppm, doublet, 2H, 3.65 ppm, multiplet, 12H, 4.0 ppm, multiplet, 12H, 4.4 ppm, multiplet, 4H, 7.6 ppm, triplet, 2H, 7.65 ppm, quartet, 1H, 7.8 ppm, multiplet, 1H, 8.4 ppm, doublet, 2H, 9.5 ppm, broad singlet, 1H. LC/MS, M+2=564.5.

Example 57

The chloropteridine (1.76 gm, 4.93×10⁻³ moles) was stirred in THF (50 mL) to which was added a solution of ammonium formate (2.5 gm) dissolved in water (4 mL). To this was added 10% palladium on carbon (200 mg). This mixture was stirred under nitrogen at reflux for 30 minutes. TLC (silica, 25% methanol in methylene chloride) showed a single, blue fluorescent compound at Rf=0.43. The warm solution was filtered free of catalyst and the precipitated salts. The filter cake was washed with hot THF (2×50 mL) and the combined filtrates were washed with 1:1 brine and water. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure and the solid residue was stirred in diethyl ether (40 mL) before being isolated by filtration. After drying there was obtained 1.4 gm (88%) of the product as a tan solid.

The hydroxypteridine (1.9 gm, 5.89×10⁻³ moles) was stirred in phosphorous oxychloride (25 mL) as diisopropylethylamine (761 mg, 5.89×10⁻³ mole) was added. This solution was heated at 75° C. for 6 hours and was then kept at room temperature overnight. Excess phosphorous oxychloride was removed under reduced pressure and the residual material was stirred with ice (30 gm) to destroy any remaining phosphorous oxychloride. This mixture was partitioned between 10% potassium carbonate solution (150 mL) and methylene chloride (150 mL). The methylene chloride solution was dried over magnesium sulfate before being filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The remaining material was used for the next step without further purification.

The chloropteridine from above was dissolved in n-butanol (50 mL) and N-methyl-N′-(2-aminoethyl)piperazine (2.0 gm, 1.4×10⁻² moles) was added. This mixture was heated at 110° C. for 30 minutes. TLC (silica, 25% methanol in methylene chloride) showed a single, blue fluorescent, product at Rf=0.093. The n-butanol was removed under reduced pressure and the residual material was extracted by stirring in diethyl ether (50 mL). This mixture was filtered and the solid filter cake was washed with diethyl ether (100 mL). The combined filtrates were extracted with water (50 mL). These aqueous extracts were treated with potassium carbonate to precipitate the product as an oil. The product was extracted into methylene chloride (100 mL). After drying over magnesium sulfate the methylene chloride solution was filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The remaining solid (1.28 gm) was dissolved in methanol (40 mL) and the solution was heated to reflux. Concentrated hydrochloric acid (982 μL) was added and the solution was cooled on ice. The hydrochloride salt of Example 57 crystallized and was isolated by filtration. After being washed with methanol followed by diethyl ether, the solid was dried to give the product as its hydrochloride salt in a yield of 950 mg. LC/MS: M+1=448.45

Example 58

The chloropteridine (1.35 gm, 3.96×10⁻³ moles) was stirred in n-butanol (20 mL) and histamine (878 mg, 7.9×10⁻³ moles) was added. This mixture was heated at 110° C. for 30 minutes. TLC (silica, 25% methanol in methylene chloride) showed a single, blue fluorescent, product at Rf=0.18. The reaction was diluted with diethyl ether (100 mL) and this mixture was extracted with 5% hydrochloric acid (100 mL) followed by water (100 mL). The combined aqueous extracts were washed with diethyl ether (100 mL) before being made basic by the addition of potassium carbonate. The basic aqueous mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (2×150 mL). After drying over magnesium sulfate the methylene chloride solution was filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The remaining solid was stirred in diethyl ether (100 mL) and was then isolated by filtration to provide 850 mg of the product as a tan solid. LC/MS: M+1=416.27

Example 59

The chloropteridine (1.35 gm, 3.96×10⁻³ moles) was stirred in n-butanol (20 mL) and 4-(2-aminoethyl)pyridine (968 mg, 7.9×10⁻³ moles) was added. This mixture was heated at 110° C. for 30 minutes. TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride) showed a single, blue fluorescent, product at Rf=0.14. The reaction was diluted with diethyl ether (100 mL) and this mixture was extracted with 5% hydrochloric acid (100 mL) followed by water (100 mL). The combined aqueous extracts were washed with diethyl ether (100 mL) before being made basic by the addition of potassium carbonate. The basic aqueous mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (2×150 mL). After drying over magnesium sulfate the methylene chloride solution was filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The remaining material was purified by chromatography on silica gel using 15% methanol in chloroform as eluent. The fractions containing the product were combined and evaporated to provide the product as a grey powder in a yield of 650 mg. LC/MS: M+1=427.26.

Example 60

The chloropteridine (852 mg, 2.5×10⁻³ moles) was stirred in n-butanol (20 mL) and 2-(2-aminoethyl)pyridine (611 mg, 5.0×10⁻³ moles) along with diisopropylethylamine (646 mg, 5.0×10⁻³ moles) were added. This mixture was heated at 110° C. for 30 minutes. TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride) showed a single, blue fluorescent, product at Rf=0.14. The reaction was diluted with diethyl ether (100 mL) and this mixture was extracted with 5% hydrochloric acid (100 mL) followed by water (100 mL). The combined aqueous extracts were washed with diethyl ether (100 mL) before being made basic by the addition of potassium carbonate. The basic aqueous mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (2×150 mL). After drying over magnesium sulfate the methylene chloride solution was filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residual oil crystallized on standing. This solid was stirred in diethyl ether (25 mL) and was then isolated by filtration to provide, after washing with diethyl ether and drying, 750 mg of the product as a tan solid. LC/MS: M+1=427.26.

Example 61

The chloropteridine (852 mg, 2.5×10⁻³ moles) was stirred in n-butanol (20 mL) and S-(2-aminoethyl)isothiourea dihydrobromide (1.41 gm, 5.0×10⁻³ moles) along with diisopropylethylamine (1.3 gm, 0.01 moles) were added. This mixture was heated at reflux for 30 minutes. The reaction was diluted with diethyl ether (200 mL) and this mixture was extracted with 5% hydrochloric acid (2×100 mL). The combined aqueous extracts were washed with diethyl ether (100 mL) before being made basic by the addition of potassium carbonate. The product separated as a pale yellow solid. This solid was isolated by filtration and washed with water to provide, after drying, 961 mg of the product as a yellow solid. LC/MS: M+1=424.21.

Example 62

The chloropteridine (852 mg, 2.5×10⁻³ moles) was stirred in n-butanol (20 mL) and 2-(aminomethyl)-5-methylpyrazine (616 mg, 5.0×10⁻³ moles) along with diisopropylethylamine (646 mg, 5.0×10⁻³ moles) were added. This mixture was heated at 110° C. for 30 minutes. TLC (silica, 20% methanol in methylene chloride) showed a single, blue fluorescent, product at Rf=0.50. The reaction was diluted with diethyl ether (200 mL) and this mixture was extracted with 5% hydrochloric acid (100 mL) followed by water (100 mL). The combined aqueous extracts were washed with diethyl ether (100 mL) before being made basic by the addition of potassium carbonate. The basic aqueous mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (2×150 mL). After drying over magnesium sulfate the methylene chloride solution was filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residual oil crystallized upon being stirred in diethyl ether (150 mL) and was then isolated by filtration to provide, after washing with diethyl ether and drying, 600 mg of the product as a tan solid. LC/MS: M+1=428.23.

Example 63

The chloropteridine (500 mg, 1.47×10⁻³ moles) was stirred in n-butanol (20 mL) N-methyl-N′-dimethylethylenediamine (300 mg, 2.93×10⁻³ moles) along with diisopropylethylamine (379 mg, 2.93×10⁻³ moles) were added. This mixture was heated at 110° C. for 30 minutes. TLC (silica, 20% methanol in methylene chloride) showed a single, blue fluorescent, product at Rf=0.14. The reaction was diluted with diethyl ether (200 mL) and this mixture was extracted with 5% hydrochloric acid (100 mL) followed by water (100 mL). The combined aqueous extracts were washed with diethyl ether (100 mL) before being made basic by the addition of potassium carbonate. The basic aqueous mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (3×100 mL). After drying over magnesium sulfate the methylene chloride solution was filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residual oil was dissolved in diethyl ether (100 mL) and to this solution was added a solution of sulfuric acid (144 mg, 1.47×10⁻³ moles) dissolved in diethyl ether (2.0 mL). The mixture containing the sulfate salt was stirred for one hour before the solid was isolated by filtration to provide, after washing with diethyl ether and drying, 425 mg of the product. LC/MS: M+1=407.5.

Example 64

The chloropteridine (852 mg, 2.5×10⁻³ moles) was stirred in n-butanol (20 mL) and 3-[1,2,4]-triazol-1-yl-propylamine (631 mg, 5.0×10⁻³ moles) along with diisopropylethylamine (646 mg, 5.0×10⁻³ moles) were added. This mixture was heated at 110° C. for 8 hours. The reaction was diluted with diethyl ether (200 mL) and this mixture was extracted with 5% hydrochloric acid (100 mL) followed by water (100 mL). The combined aqueous extracts were washed with diethyl ether (100 mL) before being made basic by the addition of potassium carbonate. The basic aqueous mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (3×100 mL). After drying over magnesium sulfate the methylene chloride solution was filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residual oil crystallized upon being stirred in diethyl ether (100 mL) and was then isolated by filtration to provide, after washing with diethyl ether and drying, 350 mg of the product as a tan solid. LC/MS: M+1=431.35.

Example 65

The chloropteridine (852 mg, 2.5×10⁻³ moles) was stirred in n-butanol (20 mL) and 2,4-diamino-6-(3-aminopropyl)amino-1,3,5-triazine (916 mg, 5.0×10⁻³ moles) along with diisopropylethylamine (646 mg, 5.0×10⁻³ moles) were added. This mixture was heated at 110° C. for 5 hours. The reaction was diluted with diethyl ether (200 mL) and this mixture was extracted with 5% hydrochloric acid (100 mL) followed by water (100 mL). The combined aqueous extracts were washed with diethyl ether (100 mL) before being made basic by the addition of potassium carbonate. The basic aqueous mixture was extracted with n-butanol (2×100 mL) and the combined extracts were washed with brine (50 mL). After drying over sodium sulfate the n-butanol solution was filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure to a volume of approximately 25 mL. This solution was cooled in the freezer overnight. The solid which crystallized was isolated by filtration to provide, after washing with n-butanol followed by diethyl ether and drying, 900 mg of the product as a tan solid. LC/MS: M+1=488.37.

Examples 66 and 67

A suspension of methyl 3-amino-5,6-dichloro-2-pyrazinecarboxylate (25.0 gm, 0.113 moles) in 2-propanol (200 mL) was stirred as pyrrolidine (8.84 gm, 0.124 moles) was added. To this mixture was added diisopropyethylamine (16.3 gm, 0.126 moles) after which the reaction was heated to reflux. At reflux, a brown solution resulted. After 2 hours at reflux, TLC (silica, 1:1 ethyl acetate and hexane) showed all of the starting material had been consumed with the formation of a single product. The reaction was cooled to room temperature which caused the product to crystallize. The solid product was isolated by filtration and was washed with 2-propanol and then with diethyl ether. After drying there was obtained 24.8 gm (85.5%) of the product as a pink solid.

The pyrazine (24.8 gm, 9.66×10⁻² moles) was stirred in pyridine (200 mL) as benzoyl chloride (33.9 gm, 0.241 moles) was added in 3 portions. This solution was stirred at 65° C. overnight. After cooling, the pyridine was removed under reduced pressure and the remaining material was dissolved in methylene chloride (400 mL) and water (200 mL) was added. To this mixture was added potassium carbonate until the aqueous was basic to litmus. The methylene chloride solution was isolated and washed with 2% HCl (250 mL.). The solution was then dried over magnesium sulfate. After filtration, the solvents were removed under reduced pressure. The remaining material was stirred with diethyl ether (200 mL) causing the product to crystallize. The solid product was isolated by filtration. After washing with diethyl ether and drying the imide was obtained as a grey solid in a yield of 36.8 gm (82%).

The imide (28.0 gm, 0.06 moles) was stirred in THF in a 500 mL pressure flask. To this was added concentrated ammonia (40 mL). The flask was sealed and heated at 65° C. for 3 hours. After cooling, the solid which crystallized was isolated by filtration. This solid proved to be starting imide. The filtrates were shown by TLC (silica, 1:1 ethyl acetate and hexane) to contain more imide (Rf=0.56) along with another compound (Rf=0.44). After evaporation of the solvents under reduced pressure, these two materials were separated by chromatography on silica using 2.5% methanol in methylene chloride. The fractions containing the product were pooled and evaporated to give the product as a white solid in a yield of 1.9 gm. LC/MS: M+1=346.25.

A slurry of the pyrazine (1.8 gm, 5.49×10⁻³ moles) in DMSO (25 mL) was stirred as a solution of potassium hydroxide (85%, 2.94 gm, 4.45×10⁻² moles) in water (25 mL) was added. This mixture was warmed to 60° C. and was then stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The thick slurry was diluted with water (25 mL) and acetic acid (2.67 gm, 4.45×10⁻² moles) was added. After stirring for 10 minutes, the pteridinone was isolated by filtration, washed with water and dried. The yield of pteridinone was 1.6 gm, (88.9%).

The pteridinone (1.6 gm, 4.88×10⁻³ moles), phosphorous oxychloride (25 mL) and diisopropylethylamine (636 mg, 4.92×10⁻³ moles) were combined and heated at 80° C. for 8 hours. The excess phosphorous oxychloride was removed under reduced pressure and the remaining material was stirred with methylene chloride (100 mL). Ice and water (100 gm) were added with stirring and potassium carbonate was added until the pH of the aqueous was 7.0. The methylene chloride solution was isolated and dried over magnesium sulfate. After filtration, the methylene chloride was evaporated under reduced pressure. The remaining dichloropteridine was used in the next step without further purification.

The dichloropteridine from above and N-(2-aminoethyl)morpholine (2.54 gm, 1.95×10⁻² moles) were added to n-butanol (50 mL). This mixture was heated at 110° C. for 12 hours. TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride) showed remaining dichloropteridine so additional N-(2-aminoethyl)morpholine (2.54 gm, 1.95×10⁻² moles) was added. Heating at 110° C. was continued for an additional 12 hours. TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride) showed two compounds at Rf=0.62 and at Rf=0.33. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the remaining material was purified by chromatography on silica using 10% methanol in methylene chloride and switching to 15% methanol in methylene chloride. The fractions containing the two compounds were pooled and evaporated under reduced pressure. Compound 1 with an Rf of 0.62 was identified as Example 66 and was isolated in a yield of 572 mg. Compound 2 with an Rf of 0.33 was identified as Example 67 and was isolated in a yield of 250 mg. LC/MS: Example 67, M+1=593.54. Example 66, M+1=534.45.

Example 68

A suspension of methyl 3-amino-5,6-dichloro-2-pyrazinecarboxylate (5.0 gm, 2.25×10⁻² moles) in 2-propanol (50 mL) was stirred as N-methylpiperazine (2.48 gm, 2.48×10⁻² moles) was added. To this mixture was added diisopropyethylamine (3.2 gm, 2.48×10⁻² moles) after which the reaction was heated to reflux. At reflux, a brown solution resulted. After 2 hours at reflux, TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride) showed all of the starting material had been consumed with the formation of a single product. The reaction was cooled to room temperature overnight which caused the product to crystallize. The solid product was isolated by filtration and was washed with 2-propanol and then with diethyl ether. After drying there was obtained 5.8 gm (90.2%) of the product as a pink solid.

The pyrazine (9.5 gm, 3.32×10⁻² moles) was stirred in pyridine (60 mL) as 4-t-butylbenzoyl chloride (16.5 gm, 8.4×10⁻² moles) was added in 3 portions. This solution was stirred at 65° C. for 20 hours. After cooling, the pyridine solution was poured into water (300 mL) and the precipitated solid was extracted into methylene chloride (2×200 mL). The combined extracts were then dried over magnesium sulfate. After filtration, the solvents were removed under reduced pressure. The remaining material was stirred with diethyl ether (100 mL). The solid product was isolated by filtration. After washing with diethyl ether and drying the imide was obtained as a tan solid in a yield of 13.5 gm (67%).

The imide (13.5 gm, 2.23×10⁻² moles) was stirred in a mixture of THF (25 mL) and methanol (65 mL). To this was added concentrated ammonia (40 mL). The mixture was heated to reflux for 2 hours. After cooling, the solvents were removed under reduced pressure, and the remaining material was dissolved in methylene chloride (250 mL). The methylene chloride solution was washed with 5% potassium carbonate (100 mL) and then water (100 mL). After drying over magnesium chloride, the solution was filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The remaining material was stirred with diethyl ether (100 mL). The solid product which crystallized was isolated by filtration. After washing with diethyl ether and drying the product was obtained as a tan solid in a yield of 9.1 gm (94.7%).

The chloropyrazine (15 gm, 3.48×10⁻² moles) was dissolved in DMF (250 mL) and 10% palladium on carbon (200 mg) was added. This mixture was hydrogenated at 50 PSI on a Parr apparatus until hydrogen consumption stopped (2 hours). The resulting slurry was transferred to a flask and heated to boiling. The hot solution was filtered to remove catalyst and the filtrates were cooled in the freezer overnight. The solid which had crystallized from solution was isolated by filtration, washed with DMF followed by diethyl ether and dried. The hydrochloride salt of the product was isolated in a yield of 5.4 gm (36%). LC/MS: M+1=39735.

A slurry of the pyrazine (1.8 gm, 5.49×10⁻³ moles) in DMSO (25 mL) was stirred as a solution of potassium hydroxide (85%, 2.94 gm, 4.45×10⁻² moles) in water (25 mL) was added. This mixture was warmed to 60° C. and was then stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The thick slurry was diluted with water (25 mL) and acetic acid (2.67 gm, 4.45×10⁻² moles) was added. After stirring for 10 minutes, the pteridinone was isolated by filtration, washed with water and dried. The yield of pteridinone was 1.6 gm, (88.9%).g

A slurry of the pyrazine (4.3 gm, 1.0×10⁻² moles) in DMSO (45 mL) was stirred as a solution of potassium hydroxide (85%, 5.36 gm, 8.11×10⁻² moles) in water (45 mL) was added. This mixture was warmed to 80° C. and was then stirred at that temperature for 2 hours. The thick slurry was diluted with water (50 mL) and acetic acid (4.86 gm, 8.11×10⁻² moles) was added. After stirring for 10 minutes, the dihydroxypteridine was isolated by filtration, washed with water and dried. The yield of dihydroxypteridine was 2.96 gm, (75%). LC/MS: M+1=395.33.

The dihydroxypteridine (2.86 gm, 7.25×10⁻³ moles), phosphorous oxychloride (50 mL), chloroform (50 mL) and diisopropylethylamine (1.87 gm, 1.45×10⁻² moles) were combined and heated to reflux for 6 hours. The excess phosphorous oxychloride and chloroform were removed under reduced pressure and the remaining material was stirred with methylene chloride (200 mL). Ice and water (100 gm) were added with stirring and sodium bicarbonate was added until the pH of the aqueous was 8.0. The methylene chloride solution was isolated and dried over magnesium sulfate. After filtration, the methylene chloride was evaporated under reduced pressure. The remaining dichloropteridine was used in the next step without further purification.

The dichloropteridine from above and N-(2-aminoethyl)morpholine (3.77 gm, 2.90×10⁻² moles) were added to n-butanol (25 mL). This mixture was heated at 110° C. for 12 hours. The reaction was diluted with diethyl ether (200 mL) and this mixture was extracted with 5% hydrochloric acid (2×100 mL). The combined aqueous extracts were washed with diethyl ether (100 mL) before being made basic by the addition of potassium carbonate. The basic aqueous mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (2×150 mL) and the combined extracts were dried over magnesium sulfate. The methylene chloride solution was filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The remaining material was purified by chromatography on silica using 25% methanol in methylene chloride and switching to 25% methanol and 2% methylamine in methylene chloride. Unreacted dichloropteridine was eluted first and the product was eluted upon switching the eluent to 25% methanol and 2% methylamine in methylene chloride. The fractions containing the product were pooled and evaporated under reduced pressure to provide Example 68 in a yield of 250 mg. LC/MS: M+1=619.54.

Example 69

Benzamidine hydrochloride (26.0 gm, 0.166 moles) and dimethyl malonate (21.9 gm, 0.166 moles) were combined in dry methanol (200 mL). This mixture was stirred as 30% sodium methoxide in methanol (89.7 gm, 0.498 moles) was added. A precipitate of sodium chloride formed and this mixture was stirred at 55° C. for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with water (500 mL) to form a clear solution. This was acidified by the addition of acetic acid (35 mL) causing a white precipitate to quickly form. After stirring for 30 minutes, the solid was isolated by filtration. The filter cake was washed, in turn with water, methanol and acetone. After drying, the 2-phenyl-4,6-dihydroxypyrimidine was obtained in a yield of 25 gm (80%) as a white solid.

Solution 1:

Aniline (9.3 gm, 0.10 moles) was dissolved in water (200 mL) and Ice (100 gm) containing concentrated hydrochloric acid (20 mL). This solution was stirred as a solution of sodium nitrite (6.9 gm, 0.10 moles) dissolved in water (50 mL) was dripped in. Once the addition was complete the diazonium solution was kept on ice as solution 2 was prepared.

Solution 2:

Sodium hydroxide (24 gm, 0.60 moles) and 2-phenyl-4,6-dihydroxypyrimidine (18.8 gm, 0.10 moles) were dissolved in water (200 mL) and once dissolution was complete, ice (100 gm) was added.

Solution 1 was slowly poured into solution 2 at ice temperature with stirring. The resulting bright orange solution was stirred and the sodium salt of the azo compound soon crystallized forming a thick slurry. After 30 minutes, the thick slurry was acidified with concentrated hydrochloric acid and after sitting for 30 minutes, the azo compound was isolated by filtration. The damp solid was washed with water and dried to provide the azopyrimidine as a yellow solid in a yield of 12.8 gm (43.7%)

The dihydroxyphenylazopyrimidine (11.7 gm, 0.04 moles) was powdered and mixed with phosphorous oxychloride (45 mL). This mixture was stirred as diisopropylethylamine (12.3 mL) was slowly added. The resulting orange slurry was heated at reflux for 1 hour. Upon cooling, excess phosphorous oxychloride was removed under reduced pressure. The residual material was treated with ice and this was then extracted with methylene chloride (300 mL). The methylene chloride extracts were washed with water (2×150 mL) before being dried over magnesium sulfate. After filtration, the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residual material was stirred with a 50/50 mixture of ethyl acetate and hexane (50 mL). The resulting solid was isolated by filtration and was washed with a 50/50 mixture of ethyl acetate and hexane. After drying, there was obtained 10.5 gm (79.7%) of the product as an orange solid.

A mixture of 2-phenyl-4,6-dichloro-5-phenylazopyrimidine (6.58 gm, 2.0×10⁻² moles) and N-(2-aminoethyl)morpholine (10.4 gm, 8.0×10⁻² moles) in n-butanol (50 mL) was heated to boiling. The thick slurry which initially formed was transformed into a solution as the mixture reached reflux. After 1 hour at reflux the hot solution was diluted with 2-propanol (100 mL) keeping the solution at reflux. After the addition of 2-propanol, heating at reflux was continued for an additional 1 hour. Upon cooling, the product crystallized as a yellow solid. After cooling on ice the solid was isolated by filtration, washed with 2-propanol and dried to provide the product as a granular orange solid in a yield of 9.8 gm, (94.8%).

The phenylazopyrimidine (16.5 gm, 3.19×10⁻² moles) was stirred in methanol (100 mL) and THF (100 mL). To this was added 10% palladium on carbon (500 mg). The solution was heated to reflux and ammonium formate (16 gm) dissolved in water (25 mL) was added in 3 portions over a period of 1 hour. After being heated at reflux for 2 hours, the orange color of the azopyrimidine had faded and TLC (silica, 10% methanol in methylene chloride) showed consumption of the azo compound with a single product (Rf=0.13). After cooling, the catalyst was removed by filtration and the filtrates were evaporated under reduced pressure. The remaining material was partitioned between methylene chloride (400 mL) and 10% potassium carbonate solution (100 mL). The solution was dried over magnesium sulfate. After filtration to remove the magnesium sulfate, the solvents were removed under reduced pressure. To the remaining material was added diethyl ether (100 mL) and this mixture was stirred for 15 minutes. The solid was isolated by filtration and was washed with diethyl ether. After drying there was obtained the triaminopyrimidine as a tan solid in a yield of 11.2 gm, (82%).

The triaminopyrimidine (0.855 gm, 2.0×10⁻³ moles) and ethyl pyruvate (0.348 gm, 3.0×10⁻³ moles) were combined in 2-butanol (10 mL). This mixture was heated to reflux forming a clear yellow solution. After being heated at reflux for 2 hours, TLC (silica, 15% methanol in methylene chloride) showed a single, blue fluorescent, product. The solution was cooled to room temperature causing the pteridinone to crystallize. To the slurry was added 2-propanol (10 mL) and stirring was continued for another 15 minutes. The pteridinone was isolated by filtration, washed with 2-propanol, and dried. The yield was 0.75 gm (78.2%). LCMS: M+1=480.3. ¹H NMR (CDCl₃): 2.57 ppm, singlet, 3H, 2.63 ppm, multiplet, 8H, 2.76 ppm, triplet, 2H, 2.80 ppm, triplet, 2H, 3.65 ppm, triplet, 4H, 3.79 ppm, triplet, 4H, 3.86 ppm, quartet, 2H, 4.64 ppm, triplet, 2H, 6.99 ppm, triplet, 1H, 7.50 ppm, multiplet, 3H, 8.48 ppm, triplet, 2H.

Example 70

The triaminopyrimidine (0.855 gm, 2.0×10⁻³ moles) and ethyl benzoylformate (0.535 gm, 3.0×10⁻³ moles) were combined in 2-butanol (10 mL). This mixture was heated to 100° C. for 16 hours. The dark red solution was cooled to room temperature overnight causing the pteridinone to crystallize. The pteridinone was isolated by filtration, washed with 2-butanol followed by diethyl ether, and dried. The yield was 0.123 gm (11.4%). LC/MS: M+1=542.4.

¹H NMR (CDCl₃): 2.63 ppm, multiplet, 4H, 2.67 ppm, multiplet, 4H, 2.77 ppm, triplet, 2H, 2.85 ppm, triplet, 2H, 3.66 ppm, multiplet, 4H, 3.81 ppm, multiplet, 4H, 3.87 ppm, multiplet, 2H, 4.73 ppm, triplet, 2H, 7.31 ppm, multiplet, 2H, 7.74 ppm, multiplet, 6H, 8.39 ppm, triplet, 2H, 8.52 ppm, doublet, 2H.

Example 71

The triaminopyrimidine (0.855 gm, 2.0×10⁻³ moles) was dissolved in warm 2-butanol (10 mL). To the warm solution was added ethyl trifluoromethylpyruvate (0.510 gm, 3.0×10⁻³ moles). This mixture was capped with a septum and was stirred at room temperature overnight. The volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the remaining material was dissolved in diethyl ether (25 mL). The solution was stirred for a few minutes causing the pteridinone to crystallize. The pteridinone was isolated by filtration, washed with diethyl ether, and dried. The yield was 0.750 gm (70.3%). LC/MS: M+1=534. ¹H NMR (CDCl₃): 2.61 ppm, broad singlet, 8H, 2.76 ppm, triplet, 2H, 2.82 ppm, triplet, 2H, 3.61 ppm, multiplet, 4H, 3.78 ppm, multiplet, 4H, 3.86 ppm, multiplet, 2H, 4.66 ppm, triplet, 2H, 7.32 ppm, multiplet, 1H, 7.55 ppm, multiplet, 3H, 8.49 ppm, doublet, 2H.

Example 72

The triaminopyrimidine (0.855 gm, 2.0×10⁻³ moles) and ethyl-4-cyanobenzoylformate (0.610 gm, 3.0×10⁻³ moles) were combined in 2-butanol (10 mL). This mixture was heated to 95° C. forming a yellow solution. Heating at 95° C. was continued overnight. The resulting slurry was cooled to room temperature and diluted with diethyl ether (25 mL). After stirring for 15 minutes the pteridinone was isolated by filtration, washed with diethyl ether, and dried. The yield of the bright yellow product was 0.860 gm (76%). LC/MS: M+1=567. ¹H NMR (CDCl₃): 2.64 ppm, multiplet, 8H, 2.79 ppm, triplet, 2H, 2.85 ppm, triplet, 2H, 3.65 ppm, triplet, 4H, 3.80 ppm, triplet, 4H, 3.91 ppm, quartet, 2H, 7.35 ppm, multiplet, 2H, 7.53 ppm, multiplet, 3H, 7.78 ppm, multiplet, 2H, 8.52 ppm, multiplet, 4H.

Example 73

To a stirred slurry of 2-phenyl-4,6-dichloro-5-phenylazopyrimidine (6.20 gm, 1.88×10⁻² moles) in 2-butanol (75 mL) was added a solution of N-methyl-N′-(2-aminoethyl)piperazine (6.0 gm, 4.19×10⁻² moles) and diisopropylethylamine (5.41 gm, 4.19×10⁻² moles) in 2-butanol (25 mL). This mixture was heated to boiling. The thick slurry which initially formed was transformed into a solution as the mixture reached reflux. The dark orange solution was heated at reflux for 5 hours. Upon cooling overnight at room temperature, the product separated as a yellow solid. The 2-butanol was removed under reduced pressure and the remaining solid was dissolved in methylene chloride (300 mL). This solution was washed with 10% potassium carbonate solution (150 mL) before being dried over magnesium sulfate. The solution was filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The remaining solid was stirred for 3 hours in diethyl ether (200 mL) and was then isolated by filtration, washed with diethyl ether and dried. The product was isolated in a yield of 5.6 gm, (55%).

The phenylazopyrimidine (4.07 gm, 7.5×10⁻² moles) was stirred in methanol (40 mL) and THF (40 mL). To this was added 10% palladium on carbon (300 mg) and ammonium formate (3 gm) dissolved in water (6 mL). The solution was heated at 55° C. After being heated at 55° C. for 15 minutes, the orange color of the azopyrimidine had faded and TLC (silica, 25% methanol in methylene chloride) showed consumption of the azo compound with a single product. Water (10 mL) was added and stirring was continued for 5 minutes. After cooling, the catalyst was removed by filtration and the filtrates were treated with potassium carbonate until basic. The mixture was stirred with methylene chloride (200 mL). The methylene chloride phase was isolated and dried over magnesium sulfate. After filtration to remove the magnesium sulfate, the solvents were removed under reduced pressure. To the remaining material was added diethyl ether (50 mL) and hexane (50 mL) and this mixture was stirred for 5 minutes. The solvents were decanted from the crude triaminopyrimidine which was used without purification in the next step.

The crude triaminopyrimidine (˜7.5×10⁻³ moles) and ethyl benzoylformate (1.34 gm, 7.5×10⁻³ moles) were combined in n-butanol (20 mL). This mixture was heated to 110° C. for 5 hours and then was kept at room temperature overnight. The n-butanol was removed under reduced pressure and the remaining material was purified by chromatography on silica using 15% methanol in methylene chloride as eluent. The fractions containing the product were pooled and evaporated under reduced pressure to yield 0.271 gm (6.4%) of the product. LC/MS: M+1=568.58.

Example 74

The triaminopyrimidine (0.855 gm, 2.0×10⁻³ moles) and ethyl-3,5-difluorobenzoylformate (0.643 gm, 3.0×10⁻³ moles) were combined in 2-butanol (10 mL). This mixture was heated at reflux for 5 hours. After cooling the pteridinone crystallized. The pteridinone was isolated by filtration, washed with 2-propanol followed by diethyl ether, and dried. The yield was 0.800 gm (69.2%). LC/MS: M+1=578.51.

TLR9 Antagonist Assay

HEK-Blue™-hTLR9 cells were obtained from InvivoGen Inc. and used to determine test compound antagonism of human TLR9 (hTLR9) driven responses. HEK-Blue™-hTLR9 cells are designed for studying the stimulation of human TLR9 by monitoring the activation of NF-kB. As described by the manufacturer, “HEK-Blue™-hTLR9 cells were obtained by co-transfection of the hTLR9 gene and an optimized secreted embryonic alkaline phosphatase (SEAP) reporter gene into HEK293 cells. The SEAP reporter gene is placed under the control of the IFN-b minimal promoter fused to five NF-kB and AP-1 binding sites. Stimulation with a TLR9 ligand activates NF-kB and AP-1 which induces the production of SEAP. Levels of SEAP can be easily determined with QUANTI-Blue™ a detection medium that turns purple/blue in the presence of alkaline phosphatase”.

TLR9 Antagonism Assay

Day 1:

A cell suspension of HEK-Blue™-hTLR9 cells at ˜450,000 cells per ml in test medium which contained 5% (v/v) heat inactivated FBS was prepared. 180 ul of cell suspension (˜80,000 cells) was added per well of a flat-bottom 96-well plate and place in an incubator at 37° C. for overnight.

Day 2

Test compounds were serially diluted in test medium, generally starting at 10 uM, and diluting by 3 fold in a 96 well master plate. 20 ul of diluted test compound was transferred using a 12 channel multi-channel pipet to the cell plate and incubated at 37° C. for 1 hour. Then 20 ul of an hTLR9 agonist (such as ODN 2006, 1 uM) was added to each well and the plate incubated at 37° C. overnight.

Day 3

Invivogen's QUANTI-Blue™ was prepared following the manufacturer's instructions. 180 ml of resuspended QUANTI-Blue™ was added per well of a flat bottom 96-well plate. 20 ul per well of induced HEK-Blue™-hTLR9 cells supernatant was then added to the plate and the plate was incubated at 37° C. for 1-3 h. SEAP levels were determined using a spectrophotometer at 620 nm.

Calculation of IC₅₀

The concentration dependent inhibition of hTLR9 dependent SEAP production was expressed as the concentration of compound which produced half the maximal level of SEAP induced by the hTLR agonist alone. Percent activity was calculated for each observation using the formula: % activity=((observed O.D.−background O.D.)/(agonist only O.D.−background O.D.))*100. The 50% inhibitory concentration (IC₅₀) was calculated by using a 4 parameter Hill plot sigmoidal curve fit where the inflection point of the sigmoidal curve is defined as the point of 50% activity. The results are shown in Table 4.

TABLE 4 hTLR9 antagonism Examples IC₅₀ (nM) Example 1 285 Example 56 317 Example 54 62 Example 69 2480 Example 70 137 Example 71 3821 Example 72 487 Example 73 124 Example 74 901 Example 57 113 Example 59 991 Example 60 2184 Example 61 >10000 Example 62 2493 Example 63 112 Example 64 2950 Example 65 198 Example 67 25 Example 66 181 Example 68 273

The Effects of Test Articles on Toll-Like Receptor (TLR) Knockdown Following a Single Intraperitoneal Dose to Male C57Bl/6 Mice.

Toll-Like Receptor (TLR) knockdown effect of test articles was evaluated in a C57Bl/6J mouse. Primary end points included a terminal blood collection for analysis of cytokine production in response to CpG-DNA TLR9 agonist injection. Male C57Bl/6J mice, at ˜8 weeks of age from Jackson Laboratories were used. Test groups were 3 mice per treatment group and the groups were administered test article in a series of descending doses within the range of 400 μg to 10 μg. The results are shown in Table 5. Test article treatment was dosed at T=0 hr by intraperitoneal injection. Agonist (CpG ODN 1668) treatment was dosed one hour later, T=1 hr by intraperitoneal injection. Necropsy was performed 3 hours post agonist treatment, T=4 hr. Blood samples were collected into serum separator tubes, allowed to clot at room temperature for at least 20 minutes, centrifuged at ambient temperature at 3000 g for 10 minutes, and the serum was extracted. ELISA was performed to determine murine IL-12 levels following manufacture's protocol (BioLegend Inc.). Serum IL-12 levels were calculated and plotted versus administered dose of antagonist and inhibitory dose at 50% (ID₅₀) was determined.

TABLE 5 In vivo TLR antagonism Examples μg ID₅₀ Example 1 76 Example 56 86 Example 54 33 Example 73 128 Example 57 36 

1. A method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulation in a mammalian species in need thereof, comprising administering to the mammalian species a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound of at least one compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,

wherein X is absent or is an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or heterocycle; Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, or SR₁, in which q is 0 or 1; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂, when connected to N, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c); R₇ is NR₃R₄; R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group; R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle; L is alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms; R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c); R₆ is halogen, cyano, aryl, SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c); each occurrence of p is independently 2-4; each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and each occurrence of R_(b) and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl; provided that when R₅ and R₆ are H or methyl, then Q is not H.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein X is absent or is an aryl, or heterocycle; and Q is (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, or SR₁, in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4.
 3. The method of claim 1, wherein X is absent or is aryl, or heterocycle; Q is (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, or SR₁, in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl; R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c); and R₆ is halogen, cyano or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c).
 4. The method of claim 1, wherein X is absent, alkyl or cycloalkyl and Q is (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), or SR₁.
 5. The method of claim 1, wherein R₆ is alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c).
 6. The method of claim 1, wherein Q is NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c).
 7. The method of claim 1, wherein X is optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle.
 8. The method of claim 1, wherein X is optionally substituted heterocycle.
 9. The method of claim 7, wherein X is halogen-substituted alkyl, halogen-substituted cycloalkyl, halogen-substituted aryl, or halogen-substituted heterocycle.
 10. The method of claim 1, wherein X is optionally substituted piperazine.
 11. The method of claim 1, wherein Y is oxygen or sulfur.
 12. The method of claim 1, wherein Y is NR₁₁.
 13. The method of claim 1, wherein R₁₁ is H.
 14. The method of claim 1, wherein L is —CH₂CH₂—.
 15. The method of claim 1, wherein NR₁R₂, NR₃R₄, and NR_(b)R_(c) are each independently a heterocycle selected from the group consisting of:

in which R_(d) is H, Me, CF₃, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, t-Bu, CH₂CMe₃, Ph, CH₂Ph, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p′)OR_(a′), (CH₂)_(p′)C(═O)OR_(a′), optionally substituted pyridine, C(═O)NR_(b′)R_(c′), and (CH₂)_(p′)NR_(b′)R_(c′), wherein R₁₂ is alkyl, phenyl, or heterocycle; R_(a′), R_(b′) and R_(c′) are each independently hydrogen, or (C₁-C₄)alkyl, or R_(b′) and R_(c′), together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic ring containing from three to seven ring atoms, which ring may optionally contain another heteroatom selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur and may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from the group consisting of alkyl, phenyl and benzyl; and p′ is 0-4.
 16. The method of claim 1, wherein the compound has the structure of:

wherein R₁, R₂, R₃, R₄, R₅, R₁₁, p, R_(b) and R_(c) are as described in claim
 31. 17. The method of claim 16, wherein L is —CH₂CH₂—.
 18. The method of claim 16, wherein R₁₁ is H.
 19. The method of claim 16, wherein NR₃R₄, NR₁R₂, and NR_(b)R_(c) are each independently


20. The method of claim 16, wherein q is
 0. 21. The method of claim 16, wherein R₅ is halogen.
 22. The method of claim 21, wherein R₅ is Cl.
 23. The method of claim 16, wherein R_(b) is H.
 24. The method of claim 16, wherein p is
 2. 25. The method of claim 16, wherein the compound has the structure of:

wherein R₁, R₂, R₃, R₄, R₅, R_(b) and R_(c) are as described in claim
 46. 26. The method of claim 25, wherein NR₃R₄, NR₁R₂, and NR_(b)R_(c) are each independently


27. The method of claim 25, wherein R₅ is Cl.
 28. The method of claim 25, wherein NR₁R₂ is NHBu.
 29. A method of inhibiting TLR-mediated immunostimulatory signaling, comprising contacting a cell expressing a TLR with an effective amount of at least one compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,

wherein X is absent or is an optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or heterocycle; Q is H, (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, or SR₁, in which q is 0 or 1; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂, when connected to N, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted (C₁-C₄)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p)OR_(a), and (CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c); R₇ is NR₃R₄; R₃ and R₄ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or alkylaryl, or R₃ and R₄ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle; Y is oxygen, sulfur, or NR₁₁, where R₁₁ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or aryl group; R₁₂ is alkyl, aryl, or heterocycle; L is alkyl or alkenyl containing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms; R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, OR_(a), SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c); R₆ is halogen, cyano, aryl, SR_(a), S(═O)R_(a), S(═O)₂R_(a), NR_(b)R_(c), S(═O)₂NR_(b)R_(c), C(═O)OR_(a), C(═O)R_(a), C(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), OC(═O)R_(a), OC(═O)NR_(b)R_(c), NR_(b)C(═O)OR_(a), NR_(b)C(═O)R_(a), alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c); each occurrence of p is independently 2-4; each occurrence of R_(a) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, heterocycle, or aryl; and each occurrence of R_(b) and R_(c) is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl, or said R_(b) and R_(c) together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded optionally form a heterocycle comprising 1-4 heteroatoms, wherein the heterocycle is optionally substituted by (C₁-C₄)alkyl; provided that when R₅ and R₆ are H or methyl, then Q is not H.
 30. The method of claim 29, wherein X is absent or is an aryl, or heterocycle; and Q is (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, or SR₁, in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4.
 31. The method of claim 29, wherein X is absent or is aryl, or heterocycle; Q is (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), OR₁, or SR₁, in which q is 0 or 1 and p is 2-4; R₁ and R₂ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, heterocycle, alkylheterocycle, or R₁ and R₂ together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded form a heterocycle, which may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from (C₁-C₄)alkyl; R₅ is hydrogen, halogen, cyano or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c); and R₆ is halogen, cyano or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c).
 32. The method of claim 29, wherein X is absent, alkyl or cycloalkyl and Q is (CH₂)_(q)NR₁R₂, NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c), or SR₁.
 33. The method of claim 29, wherein R₆ is alkaryl, alkylheterocyclic, or NR_(b)(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c).
 34. The method of claim 29, wherein Q is NR₁(CH₂)_(p)NR_(b)R_(c).
 35. The method of claim 29, wherein X is optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or heterocycle.
 36. The method of claim 29, wherein X is optionally substituted heterocycle.
 37. The method of claim 35, wherein X is halogen-substituted alkyl, halogen-substituted cycloalkyl, halogen-substituted aryl, or halogen-substituted heterocycle.
 38. The method of claim 29, wherein X is optionally substituted piperazine.
 39. The method of claim 29, wherein Y is oxygen or sulfur.
 40. The method of claim 29, wherein Y is NR₁₁.
 41. The method of claim 29, wherein R₁₁ is H.
 42. The method of claim 29, wherein L is —CH₂CH₂—.
 43. The method of claim 29, wherein NR₁R₂, NR₃R₄, and NR_(b)R_(c) are each independently a heterocycle selected from the group consisting of:

in which R_(d) is H, Me, CF₃, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, t-Bu, CH₂CMe₃, Ph, CH₂Ph, C(═O)R₁₂, (CH₂)_(p′)OR_(a′), (CH₂)_(p′)C(═O)OR_(a′), optionally substituted pyridine, C(═O)NR_(b′)R_(c′), and (CH₂)_(p′)NR_(b′)R_(c′), wherein R₁₂ is alkyl, phenyl, or heterocycle; R_(a′), R_(b′) and R_(c′) are each independently hydrogen, or (C₁-C₄)alkyl, or R_(b′) and R_(c′), together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a saturated or unsaturated heterocyclic ring containing from three to seven ring atoms, which ring may optionally contain another heteroatom selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur and may be optionally substituted by from one to four groups which may be the same or different selected from the group consisting of alkyl, phenyl and benzyl; and p′ is 0-4.
 44. The method of claim 29, wherein the compound has the structure of:

wherein R₁, R₂, R₃, R₄, R₅, R₁₁, p, R_(b) and R_(c) are as described in claim
 59. 45. The method of claim 44, wherein L is —CH₂CH₂—.
 46. The method of claim 44, wherein R₁₁ is H.
 47. The method of claim 44, wherein NR₃R₄, NR₁R₂, and NR_(b)R_(c) are each independently


48. The method of claim 44, wherein q is
 0. 49. The method of claim 44, wherein R₅ is halogen.
 50. The method of claim 49, wherein R₅ is Cl.
 51. The method of claim 44, wherein R_(b) is H.
 52. The method of claim 44, wherein p is
 2. 53. The method of claim 44, wherein the compound has the structure of:

wherein R₁, R₂, R₃, R₄, R₅, R_(b) and R_(c) are as described in claim
 74. 54. The method of claim 53, wherein NR₃R₄, NR₁R₂, and NR_(b)R_(c) are each independently


55. The method of claim 53, wherein R₅ is Cl.
 56. The method of claim 53, wherein NR₁R₂ is NHBu. 